JP2021194216A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a group performance more suitably.SOLUTION: In a group notice performance, by designing a second display period progressed by allowing characters to appear one after another to be longer than a first display period until display of characters is completed first after display of characters is started first, thus providing an ideal group notice performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that executes a group effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of performing a group effect in which images of a plurality of characters and objects appear.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-050851

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the game by executing the group production, but there is still room for improvement in such a group production.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of more preferably performing group production.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with a sound output means to output sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. A specific volume higher than the predetermined volume is set, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. Output the production sound,
In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed.
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image.
The first image is a characteristic image representing the predetermined animation rather than the second image.
The display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than the display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a screen in an image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating various boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the prevariation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prevariation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table in each notice production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group notice work process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the 6-person group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the priority of the display in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the motion blur processing used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the contour when characters overlap in a group notice effect. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device during execution of a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the failure example in this video production process. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of volume and the luminance data table in a group notice effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the mechanism of output to an LED driver. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of all light emission. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of a PUSH effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example in the case where the 6-person group notice is executed in the stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the background notice is executed in the stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when a lamp notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. 3 is for explaining the production mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in the stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the details of a boingo group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the 6-person group notice and the dog group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement (stepping ver.) of a character in a normal time. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement (scroll ver.) of a character in a normal time. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement (scroll ver.) of a character in a normal time. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of a character at the time of a group notice production and a normal time. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of a character at a normal time. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of a character at the time of a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of a character at the time of a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of a character at the time of a group notice production.

[Configuration of pachinko game machines, etc.]
1 and 2 are front views of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 and 2 show an arrangement layout of main members in a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by variably displaying a special symbol. The "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

Two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also referred to as "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. Update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumemu-chan, who appears in the production performed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yumemu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1. Further, on the lower right game board 2 of the image display device 5, a character named Jam who appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumemu-chan is the main character, it is the most important of all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters including Jam-chan. In addition, Jam is the most important character other than Yumemu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumemu-chan. In addition, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, is a character that appears first in the scene where a character is selected, a character that is placed in the most prominent position, or a character that is fully selected. It may be the character located at the highest rank among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 8). The variable-sweep wing device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second start winning opening is used. It becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as a closed state in which the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 8), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (see FIG. 8). Hereinafter, it is usually referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A includes a gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 3) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning opening door is provided in the space between the pachinko machines, and this large winning opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open and close the normal large winning opening with a gaming ball. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 8), the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the normal large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 8), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as V large). Form a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the route to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 24 (see FIG. 8) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to the probable change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol is performed. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member with the letters "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation or the name of a singer). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "dream" indicating the main character Yume-chan. You may show a dream "). In the present embodiment, the model name (powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 1 and a position overlying the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, in the movable body 32, among the members with the letters "POWERFUL" and the members with the letters "2", only the members with the letters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 2, the image is stopped at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 8).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 8).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special LED board 20 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 and notifies a first reserved storage number, a second reserved storage number, and the like by lighting / emitting (lighting) / blinking / turning off the LED. In the following, "lighting" and "light emission" are used with the same or substantially the same meaning. In the special figure LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special figure) in the first special figure game and the special symbol in the second special figure game are determined by the combination of light emission modes such as light emission / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 5A, which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, the combination of light emission modes such as light emission / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 is used. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of light emission modes such as light emission / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by emitting / blinking / extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are combined by the combination of light emission modes such as light emission / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 5B, which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, a combination of light emitting modes such as light emission / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 may be used. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of light emission modes such as light emission / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 54.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V large winning opening are opened to win the V prize. A V lamp 9G that notifies that a round of possible jackpot gaming states is in progress and a V prize has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and a stick controller 31A. The stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is equipped with a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the letter "POWERFUL" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the accessory lamp 9A1 is behind the "P" and "O" portions, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is. The accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamps 9A4 are arranged on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the member with the letters "POWERFUL", so that the "POWERFUL" is lit (light-emitting).

The panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "dream dream" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan) is drawn in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are the main characters. Is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the left side lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, respectively, divided into three areas, left, middle, and right. Has been done. The portion of the game board 2 provided with the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, whereby the on-board lamps are formed. When the 9C1 to 9C13 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the upper portion of the game board 2, the upper portion of the game board 2 is lit (light-emitting) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 marked with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (light emitting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (light emitting).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and by lighting (light emitting), the stick controller 31A is lit (light emitting). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and by lighting (light emitting), the push button 31B is lit (light emitting).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 4) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The left side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 4) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The right side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chew lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the frame left lamp 9L, And the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 8).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 8) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has twelve lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 in a counterclockwise direction from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L emits light or blinks a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example) to emit light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has 11 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12 clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R emits light or blinks each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to emit light near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the special figure LED substrate 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. 5A, the special figure LED board 20 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 21 showing a variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable display unit showing a variable display of the second special figure. 22, a special figure 1 storage display unit 23 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 storage display unit 24 showing a second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. , The normal figure storage display unit 25 showing the number of reserved normal figures, the normal figure display unit 26 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, the right-handed display unit 30 for urging the player to hit right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. A probability variation display unit 28 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, a time reduction display unit 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 27 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit are provided. Each display unit notifies the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special figures or ordinary symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of holdings, etc. by lighting (light emission) or blinking by a light emitting means such as an LED. can do.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting (light emitting) / blinking / extinguishing by a light emitting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 displays a stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. Notify the player by emitting / blinking / extinguishing by the light emitting means of.

Further, the special figure LED substrate 20 can urge the player to strike right by emitting / blinking / extinguishing by a light emitting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 30. In the present embodiment, when the player is urged to hit right, the light emitting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 30 emits light, and the player is not urged to hit right, that is, left-handed. When urging the player to do so, the light emitting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, causes the right-handed display unit 30 to emit light, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , The right-handed display / off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may make the right-handed display unit 30 emit light only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 30.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the left region of the gaming area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is present ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big winning opening) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). Flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 30 urges the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls is paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by inserting a game ball into a normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player can make a right-handed hit while the display prompting the right-handed hit is made. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probable change state. For this reason, the player may have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. It should be noted that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the fourth symbol unit 50 has a special figure 1 storage display unit 51 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure game corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 52 showing the number of reserved storage, special figure 1 variable display unit 53 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. A special figure 2 variable display unit 54 showing the above, and a right-handed display unit 55 that urges the player to hit right-handed are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by emitting / blinking / extinguishing by a light emitting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by emitting / blinking / extinguishing by a light emitting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. Notify the player by emitting / blinking / extinguishing by the light emitting means of.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by the light emitting means such as the LED in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 1 variable display unit 53. Also called. Further, the fact that the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by the light emitting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. Refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the light emitting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 emits light, and the player performs right-handed hitting. When not prompting, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the light emitting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 causes the right-handed display unit 55 to emit light based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the symbol changes due to the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After confirmation, the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may make the right-handed display unit 55 emit light only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 6 is a view looking through between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized. ..

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays an image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern or a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is used. Etc.) are variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage display area 5D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays A displayable second hold storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the special symbol and the fourth symbol 5J indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are displayed. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol 5M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 5M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 7, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 5M has a size smaller than the decorative symbol at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. Have been placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is a quadrangle or a substantially quadrangle, but as described above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed so as to cover it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part (particularly the end) of the screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the gaming board 2. It has become.

[Board configuration]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric parts including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting an alternating current (AC) into a direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special figure LED board 20 and the like, solenoid drive signals). Consists of including.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, a V winning switch 24) for detecting a game ball. A detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) assigns an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that specifies the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image, and emits / turns off the game effect lamp 9. Brightness data (a signal for designating the light emission / extinguishing mode of the lamp) to be performed is supplied to the LED driver. Further, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED substrate on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies a current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light / blink / turn off by adjusting the current for each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the luminance data from the effect control CPU 120. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls light emission / blinking / extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include an output port for.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can emit light (blink) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special drawing game by the special drawing 1 variable display unit 21 of the special drawing LED board 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special drawing game by the special drawing 2 variable display unit 22 of the special drawing LED board 20 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, which will be described later). The actual design differs depending on the type of big hit.) When the combination of light emitting modes corresponding to) is used, the "big hit" is obtained. It should be noted that the light emitting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20. Is also referred to as a "specific display result". Further, the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol. ) Corresponds to the combination of light emitting modes, it becomes a "small hit". Further, the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol. When the combination of light emitting modes corresponding to the design) is used, it becomes "missing". It should be noted that, in the combination of the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20, a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is used. The light emitting mode corresponding to the design) is also referred to as a “loss display result”.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state. In addition, it is not always necessary to provide a small hit as a hit type.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until early timing. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type that can hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state for some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It may be turned off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach, super reach with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach with higher jackpot reliability than super reach. Also, in Super Reach, it is divided into the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the normal reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived with the strongest reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "first half of SP", and "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "second half of SP".

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (the above-mentioned specific display result), it is predetermined as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol that is a combination of big hits is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to "small hit", a predetermined small hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol (for example, "1 3 5") is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "small hit"). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit" of some big hit types (a big hit type of a big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes a "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to "loss" (the above-mentioned loss display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, but the variable display of the decorative symbol. As a display result of, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "non-reach loss") of the non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Various tables related to big hits]
Various tables related to big hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

(Hit type)
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a hit type. As shown in FIG. 9, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of three rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 1, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 6 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 6, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 7 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 7 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 7, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpots 8 and 9, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(Each random number)
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 10, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to its upper limit of 65536, and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for determining the post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns. Post-variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation in the special symbol. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss. For example, it is updated one by one, added and updated from 1, and added and updated up to the upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Will be updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit. For example, it is added and updated from 1 to 1 and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 239, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the pre-variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a pre-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the special symbol. Random 5 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 251 and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 6 is, for example, incremented and updated from 1 to 1, incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 201, and then incremented and updated from 1 again.

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) whether or not the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Then, which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 2.

First, the posterior variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random number for determining the posterior variation pattern (random 3 and 4), and the anterior variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the anterior variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

The jackpot judgment values are set for the number of judgment values shown in the upper column of FIG. 11 (a) in the normal jackpot determination table, and the lower column of FIG. 11 (a) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. The jackpot judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time, and the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the probability change is added to the normal time. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 11A shows the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit or the probability (ratio) of becoming a loss.

11 (b) and 11 (c) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11B is a first special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when the big hit is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 11C is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure big hit type determination table of FIG. 11B, the numerical values are compared with the random 2 values for the big hit type determination, and correspond to the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probable variable big hits 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of determined judgment values. For example, as shown in FIG. 11B, for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is 100 random 2s. 25 of the random 2 values are assigned, the probability variation jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 5 random 2 out of 100 random 2 and the probability variation jackpot 2 is 37 of the 100 random 2 Random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 4 is 4 random 2 out of 100 random 2s. The value of is assigned.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11C, determination values are set for the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 2. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), for the second special figure, the probability variation jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variation jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2s. 5 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 8 is 70 out of 100 random 2s. The value of each random 2 is assigned, and the probability variation jackpot 9 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 2 values match as the jackpot type, and the random 2 values match as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Direction control command]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 which is the control board on the main side transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 12 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (pre-variation pattern) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of pre-variation patterns, there is a pre-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the pre-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the posterior variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variation jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variation jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variation jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variation jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 5 is determined. The command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variation jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variation jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variation jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variation jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 9 is determined. Each of the loss designation command, the normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 9 designation command, or these are collectively referred to as an 8C system command.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command that specifies the initialization (designates to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probabilistic state specification command for designating the background of the probabilistic state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 2. The command A003 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 1. The command A004 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 4 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 2. The command A005 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 4. The command A007 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 7 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 5. The command A008 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 8 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 6. The command A009 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 9 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 7. The command A010 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 8. The command A011 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 11 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closure of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 2. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command for designating that a V prize has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

The command B100 (H) is a first start winning prize designation command for designating that there was a first start winning prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the jackpot determination, the jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating light emission of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to send the data to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 19.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main side. Each variation pattern is managed by the main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern corresponding to the post-variation. It is designed to include. The pre-variation pattern corresponds to the pre-variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 12, and the post-variation pattern corresponds to the post-variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. Corresponds to.

(Pre-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Is. The pre-variation number 2 is a pre-variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ×) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ○) (reach in which the movable body 32 operates in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (reach that becomes a reach mode and develops into a final reach).

The pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Variable display (variable display). The effect of repeating such pseudo-variations is also called pseudo-ream. By executing the pseudo-ream, the variable display based on one hold memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The variable display that is temporarily stopped and then restarted is also referred to as "re-variable display". The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after one pseudo-variation. The pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the pre-variation patterns, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting the moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1246. Further, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1861.

(Post-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of posterior variation patterns to which the posterior variation numbers are assigned, the posterior variation number 1 is a posterior variation pattern command (8400 (H)) for designating a 13-second variation. The post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401 (H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. The post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402 (H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. The post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403 (H)) that specifies that the pseudo-continuous gassing is executed. Pseudo-ren Gase is an effect that pretends to execute pseudo-ren and does not execute pseudo-ren in the end.

The post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach). The post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the latter half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode and becomes a hit mode). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that specifies the first half (hit) of the SP (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B (H)) that specifies the final reach (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes the hit mode in the final reach).

(Judgment of post-variation pattern)
The post-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters in the jackpot determination depending on whether it is determined to be a jackpot or a loss. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. As shown in FIG. 15, when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 3 described with reference to FIG. Further, when the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved storages after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the number of reserved storages after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined as the post-variation pattern. A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 3, one of the post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and further, the post-variation number is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, which makes it possible to give variety to the game and improve the fun of the game.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 16, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described with reference to FIG. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of determination values according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpot 1, 2 and the probabilistic jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8, any of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12. The posterior variation pattern is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When it is determined to be one of the probabilistic jackpots 3 and 9, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. .. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of variation pattern changes according to the type of jackpot, thereby giving diversity to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 at the time of loss, whereas it is a big hit. Since the time is about 1 / 1.1, which is higher than that, when the SP reach or the final reach is developed, the player can be expected to have a big hit.

(Judgment of pre-variation pattern)
FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a pre-variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined. Further, the pre-variation number determined is also different depending on the type of the post-variation pattern determined earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 1 is determined, the posterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17B, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 2 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17C, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 3 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17D, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 4 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17 (e), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 5 and 9, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4 and 7. As shown in FIG. 17 (f), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 6 and 10, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4, 7 and 10. As shown in FIG. 17 (g), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 7 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation number 5.

As shown in FIG. 17 (h), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 11 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation number 5. As shown in FIG. 17 (i), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 8 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12 of the anterior variation number 6. As shown in FIG. 17 (j), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 12 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9, and 12.

As shown in FIGS. 17 (g) and 17 (h), the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation number 11 in which the pseudo-variation is performed twice is the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 7 and 11 that develops into the SP latter half reach. Most likely to be decided. Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 (i) and 17 (j), the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation number 12 in which the pseudo-variation is performed twice is the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 8 and 12 that develops into the final reach. The probability of being determined is the highest. Therefore, when the pseudo-variation is performed twice, the player can be expected to develop into the SP latter half reach or the final reach.

(Total variation pattern)
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, any of the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 18 is obtained.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. Further, on the sub side as well, the fluctuation patterns of the sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each notice production]
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table in each notice effect. In the present embodiment, a notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The notice effect is also an effect that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a big hit, and is also an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. The notice effect includes a group notice effect (also called a group notice or a group effect), an SP first half title notice effect (also called an SP first half title notice), a conversation notice, and a pseudo-ren (also called a pseudo-ren effect). Is done.

The group notice effect is an effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of objects progress as a group. Multiple objects include any moving object, such as a character such as a person, fish or animal, or a machine such as an airplane or car. The object such as a character may be of one type or may be of a plurality of types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of group notice effects are provided. Specifically, a 6-person group notice in which 6 characters dressed as maids progress in a group, a Baku Chu group notice in which a mouse character with a body of a bomb named Baku Chu progresses in a group, A Boingo group notice can be executed in which a character named Boingo progresses as a group.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the group notice effect is executed by the group notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8, 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. Or, the type of group notice effect to be performed is determined.

FIG. 20A shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage A. In the present embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of stages having different production modes (background image, BGM, sound effect, appearing character, etc.) are provided. .. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage A is a stage in which a character named Yumemu-chan, which is included in the six characters dressed as maids, is directed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 15%, and 6 of them have a probability of 13%. It will be decided as a group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 85%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 55%, and 30%. It is decided to announce the Boingo group with the probability of.

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320 and the probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss The probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of becoming a big hit is about 1/320 and the probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is about 1 / 1.1, the variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. The probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 85%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

FIG. 20B shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage B. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage B is a stage in which a character called Baku Chu is performed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (b), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 10%, and the explosion is performed with a probability of 8%. It will be decided as a Chu group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 90%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 60%, and 30 It is decided to be a Boingo group notice with a probability of%.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability that the variation pattern after the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 90%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 74%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 74%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

The SP first half title notice is an effect suggesting that when the SP reach is developed, it will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the character image showing the title of the first half of the SP reach. In the present embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both the stage A and the stage B, but the advance notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is the case of the stage B. Is only executed. Even in the case of stage A, a notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the title in the first half of the SP may be executed.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the SP first half title notice is executed by the SP first half title notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. , And the type of SP first half title notice to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 20 (c), when the posterior variation number 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the SP first half title notice is executed with a probability of 20%, and the posterior variation number corresponding to the hit. If the post-variation pattern of 10 to 12 is determined, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title notice will be executed.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 20%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability that the variation pattern after the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 80%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of hitting is about 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the SP first half title notice is executed is about 56%. The reliability (expectation) of the title notice in the first half of the SP is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

In this way, the reliability (expectation of big hit) in the group notice is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability in the SP first half title notice (in the case of big hit). Expectation) is 56%, and the group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice. Therefore, when the group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title notice is executed, and the player is executed the group notice rather than the SP first half title notice. I have come to expect.

In addition, the boingo group notice in stage A is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed, it is executed. , Almost likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it is lost. The probability of being is greater than the Boingo group notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the 6-person group notice. I have come to expect.

Similarly, the boingo group notice in stage B is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed. Is likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu group notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit, so the Baku Chu group notice is executed. The possibility of losing is greater than the Baku Chu Mondai notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Baku Chu group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the Baku Chu group notice. I have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, and is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit. For this reason, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed at a higher rate than the 6-person group notice in stage A at the time of a big hit. As a result, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A, and the player has 6 more than the 6-person group notice. We are now expecting the crowd announcement to be carried out.

The reliability of the group notice in stage A and the reliability of the group notice in stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group notice in stage A and the group notice in stage B need to be more reliable than the SP first half title notice, and the boingo group notice is higher than the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice. It suffices if the reliability is high.

The conversation notice effect is an effect that suggests that the changing symbol becomes a jackpot symbol (that is, a jackpot occurs) and expects the player to generate a jackpot. The conversation notice effect is an effect using a conversation (display of a character image related to the conversation) by a character or the like, and includes a conversation notice in a plurality of types of modes. Specifically, the conversation notice production includes an explanation of the game characteristics of the game performed on the pachinko game machine 1, an explanation of a story related to the game performed on the pachinko game machine 1, and a message (character) such as "chance!". By displaying the symbol, the player is expected to become a jackpot symbol (that is, a jackpot occurs).

In the present embodiment, the conversation notice effect is executed according to which of the pre-variation patterns of the pre-variation numbers 4 to 12 that develops into reach is determined by the conversation advance notice execution lottery. Whether or not and the type of conversation notice are determined.

As shown in FIG. 20 (d), when the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo-variation is determined, the conversation notice effect is executed with a probability of 60%, and each of them has a probability of 20%. , Game-like explanation, story explanation, and "chance!" When the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 in which the pseudo-variation is performed once is determined, the conversation notice effect is executed with a probability of 60%, and the explanation and the story of the game are each performed with a probability of 20%. It is decided to be one of the explanation and "chance!". When the pseudo-variation is determined to be the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which the pseudo-variation is performed twice, the conversation notice effect is executed with a probability of 60%, and the explanation and the story of the game are each with a probability of 20%. It is decided to be one of the explanation and "chance!".

Here, each of the fluctuation patterns of the previous fluctuation numbers 4 to 12 is selected with the same probability in the case of loss and the case of hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), the probability that the loss and the conversation notice effect is executed is 60%, whereas the probability that the hit and the conversation notice effect is executed is 60%. The probability of a big hit (reliability, expectation) when the advance notice is executed is about 50%. As described above, the conversation notice effect is an effect in which the degree of expectation that the changing symbol becomes a big hit symbol (that is, the degree of expectation that a big hit occurs) is lower than that of the group advance notice effect and the SP title advance notice effect. Regarding the degree of expectation that the changing symbol becomes a big hit symbol (that is, the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur), the expectation in the conversation notice production is lower than the expectation in the group notice production and the SP title notice production. If so, any of the calculation methods may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined by the conversation advance notice execution lottery that the conversation advance notice effect is executed, which of the previous variation numbers 4 to 12 is selected by the conversation advance notice character color lottery. Correspondingly, the character color in the conversation notice is determined.

As shown in FIG. 20 (e), when the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo-variation is determined, the character color is determined to be green with a probability of 20%, and the character color is determined to be green with a probability of 30%. Is determined to be yellow, and the character color is determined to be blue with a 50% probability. When the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 in which the pseudo-variation is performed once is determined, the character color is determined to be green with a probability of 25%, the character color is determined to be yellow with a probability of 35%, and 40. The text color is determined to be blue with a probability of%. When the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which the pseudo-variation is performed twice is determined, the character color is determined to be red with a probability of 20%, the character color is determined to be green with a probability of 25%, and 25. The character color is determined to be yellow with a probability of%, and the character color is determined to be blue with a probability of 30%.

In this way, the character color in the conversation notice becomes red only when the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which the pseudo-variation is performed twice is determined. As a result, when the conversation notice effect is executed with the red character color, it is confirmed that the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice, so that the probability of developing the second half of the SP reach and the final reach is high, and the player is given a big hit. You can expect it.

Even when the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo-variation is determined or the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 in which the pseudo-variation is performed once is determined, the character color is changed. It may be determined to be red. In this case, when the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 4 to 6 is determined, or the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 is determined. If the probability that the character color is determined to be red is higher than in the case, the probability of developing into the SP second half reach or the final reach is the highest when the conversation notice effect is executed with the red character color, and the player. Can be expected to be a big hit.

In this way, whether or not the group notice effect is executed and its type are determined by a lottery using the post-variation number regarding the post-variation, so that the normal reach, the SP first half reach, the SP second half reach, the final reach, and their reach are determined. It is possible to set the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit in the group notice production in detail according to the situation, such as the presence or absence of the big hit in. On the other hand, whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed and its type and character color are determined by a lottery using the pre-variation number regarding the pre-variation without using the post-variation number, regardless of the type of reach. The amount of data used for the lottery can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect by using a suitable lottery method according to the type of effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo-ream mode is determined according to which of the pre-variation patterns of the pre-variation numbers 4 to 12 that develops into reach is determined by the pseudo-ream mode lottery. It is determined. The pseudo-ream aspect includes an aspect of displaying characters such as "NEXT3", "NEXT!", And "NEXT?".

As shown in FIG. 20 (f), when the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 4 to 6 without pseudo-variation is determined, it is determined to be "NEXT?" With a probability of 100%. In this case, even if the character "NEXT?" Is displayed, the pseudo-variation is not performed because it is a so-called ghost effect. When the pseudo-variation is determined to be the pre-variation pattern of the pre-variation numbers 7 to 9 in which the pseudo-variation is performed once, it is determined to be "NEXT!" With a probability of 50% and to "NEXT?" With a probability of 50%. As a result, when "NEXT!" Or "NEXT?" Is displayed, the player can be expected to perform the pseudo-variation once. When the pseudo-variation is determined to be the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation numbers 10 to 12 in which the pseudo-variation is performed twice, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be "NEXT3", a 30% probability that it is determined to be "NEXT!", And a 30% probability. It is decided to be "NEXT?" With the probability of. As a result, when "NEXT3", "NEXT!", Or "NEXT?" Is displayed, the player can be expected that the pseudo-variation will be performed twice. Furthermore, when "NEXT3" is displayed, it is confirmed that the pseudo-variation is performed twice, so that the probability of developing to the second half reach or the final reach of the SP is high, and the player can expect a big hit. ..

In this way, the mode of the pseudo-ream is determined by the lottery using the pre-variable number without using the post-variable number, regardless of the type of reach, so that the amount of data used in the lottery is reduced. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect by using a suitable lottery method according to the type of effect. In the present embodiment, whether or not to perform pseudo-variation is already included as information on the pre-variation pattern, but whether or not to perform pseudo-variation is not included as information on the pre-variation pattern. Whether or not to perform the pseudo-variation may also be determined by a lottery using the pre-variation number relating to the pre-variation.

Whether or not the group notice effect is executed and its type, whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed and its type and character color, and the mode of the pseudo-ream are a set of the front variation number and the rear variation number as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19. Since it is not determined by a lottery using a variation number corresponding to the total variation pattern, it is possible to avoid an increase in the amount of data used for the lottery and an increase in the work load at the time of designing the lottery. be able to.

Whether or not the group notice effect is executed and the type thereof are determined by a lottery using a variation number corresponding to the total variation pattern in which the front variation number and the rear variation number are set, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19. May be done. By doing so, it is possible to set the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit in the group notice production in more detail according to the situation.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 makes necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the recovery process (step S4) and then the setting confirmation process (step S5). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the game is stopped, which is different from the lost symbol. It suffices to control so that the display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like. Turn off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in the gaming stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, a pressing operation of the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted. (Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 starts the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined information output process. Data such as information (information indicating the number of start winnings and the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal map game is performed by driving the normal map display unit 26, and the normal map storage display unit 25 is made to emit light to display the number of reserved normal maps.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 22. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 22 being executed after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 23. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step S51). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52). It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B (step). S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing any of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S58). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 uses the random number value random 1 for jackpot determination and the jackpot type determination among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value random 2 and the random number value random 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit (not shown), while the start port buffer value is "2". At a certain time, numerical data indicating random values random 1 to random 4 is stored in a second special figure holding storage unit (not shown).

For the numerical data indicating the random value random 1 for determining the jackpot and the random value random 2 for determining the jackpot type, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result is "". It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". Random random values 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step S59, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for sending the first start winning prize designation command is made to. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is seconded. 2 Make settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 22 after the special symbol process process is completed. To.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the hold storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start opening buffer, initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information (step S1001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step S1002). If a predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area is "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step S1004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating "second" (that is, the data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). 1 Set the data indicating "first" in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage becomes the second. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command of the side indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step S1009). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, when the number of jackpot determination values is probable, the jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical values in the lower column of FIG. 11A) are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values is probable. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 11A) are set to be less than the jackpot determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in a state or a time-saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) and the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier of the conditions is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 11 (b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 11 (c) are used. Select one of the judgment tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11B. Further, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11C when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the jackpot type extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and stores the random number for determining the jackpot type in the reserved storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determining table. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 26, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the post-variation pattern based on random 3 and 4 according to the number of reserved storages and the presence / absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the number of reserved storages, and after the selection, the post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 3 are used later. Determine the variation pattern. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16 according to the type of the big hit, and determines the post-variation pattern based on the selected post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the pre-variation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the pre-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and pre-variates based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5. Determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop process (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 22. Control for derivation display is performed (step S1301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the change of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROМ101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and between rounds are performed for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal big hit of 3R, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot of 5R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. .. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit has occurred), which is the big hit display time, is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S1307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set (step S1309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has ended, and the time reduction flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the reduced working hours state, the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step S1311 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is set is set (step S1313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability change flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the reduced working hours state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (step S1315), and in step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1316), and the processing is terminated.

(Pre-processing for opening big hits)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 29, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during the opening of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 30, in the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step S1503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change determination flag is set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 31, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604). End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the open number counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step S1605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round in which the V large winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 32, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set in step S1705 (step S1705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game state is the probability change, the time saving, or the normal game state by the probability change state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing of production control)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a light emission operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. The effect control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 33. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. By driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illuminated signals) to the LED driver. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as lighting / extinguishing / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. As shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S7103).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the loss symbol determination data table to determine the display result of the loss that does not reach as the final stop of the effect symbol (step). S7105), the process proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), a stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (step S7104), and step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, when it is not decided to make a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is decided to make a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 configures a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing the process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the group notice setting process), the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol variation control is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are stored as multiple types of symbol variation control patterns. Has been done.

Further, each symbol variation control pattern is used for displaying variation of the effect symbol such as the effect control process timer setting value, the effect control process timer determination value, the effect display control data, the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations according to the situation, and the contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like are set in time series.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process of step S7109, the effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and various lamps as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data), and Control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as production parts) is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, the image display device 5 outputs a command to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (luminance data) is output to the LED driver in order to control light emission / extinguishing of various LEDs and other light emitters. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice setting process. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing the group advance notice has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation pattern command including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss, and a variation pattern including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. Determine if a command has been received. The variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 is the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 8 to 15, and the variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is the main variation number 18. It is a fluctuation pattern of ~ 26.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not received the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (Y in step S7061), the effect control CPU 120 converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 22, since the pre-variation time is 41500 msec, the number of frames is about 1246, and since the post-variation time is 91900 msec, the number of frames is about 3000. Further, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26, since the pre-variation time is 62000 msec, the number of frames is about 1861, and since the post-variation time is 142,800 msec, the number of frames is about 4288. ..

The effect control CPU 120 executes a group notice lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the group notice lottery table shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B to determine whether or not to execute the group notice based on the post-variation number, and to execute the group notice. Determine the type of.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group has won the advance notice lottery. If the effect control CPU 120 is not won in the group notice lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the group advance notice lottery (Y in step S7064), the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice according to the stage is extracted (step S7065), and the process ends.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 985th frame among the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 1385th frame out of the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 1600th frame among the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26 and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 2000th frame among the 4288 frames in the post-variation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display during effect process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the effect control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

When the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice is not set (N in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control pattern for executing the group notice is set (Y in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the frame of the group notice execution timing has been reached (S7203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of the stage A.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not reached the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (N in step S7203), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 reaches the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group notice (step S7204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to emit light, blink, or turn off the game effect lamp 9 based on the group warning luminance data table shown in FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L. Controls to output sound. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first launches a gaming ball by left-handing toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the gaming area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that urges the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow directed to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handedness are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 30 of the special figure LED substrate 20 and the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 also promote right-handedness by emitting light from a light emitting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning openings are opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a normal big hit of 3R and 10 times in the case of a probable big hit of 10R). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V prize is generated during the big hit round, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled in the time saving state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special map fluctuation time (period in which the special map is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal map is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened is increased, so that the frequency at which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As described above, there are 5 to 9 probabilistic jackpots as the types of jackpots in the second special figure game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 has continued from the time of the first hit.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced time state and the probable change state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is finished, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probable change state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 ends. As a result, the player will launch the game ball toward the first flow path through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Design of group notice production]
Next, the design of the group notice effect in the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice work process. As shown in FIG. 38, the work process of the group notice consists of a summary document creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), this video production process (step S903), and an authoring process in the order of the work. (Step S904), sound creation process (step S905), lottery incorporating process (step S906), video incorporating process (step S907), sound incorporating process (step S908), and lamp data. The production step (step S909) and the lamp incorporating step (step S910) are included.

In the process of creating the summary document in step S901, a summary document for newly designing the group notice is created in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process of step S902, the storyboard of the animation used in the group notice is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-conte is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. Production and actual animation production are performed.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group notice is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group notice is created in this video production process, but the reproduction time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group notice actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created longer. As a result, even if the execution time of the group notice becomes long due to the design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as it is without being changed. Further, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each production. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 985th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 1385th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 2000th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video reproduction executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation step of step S905, data of various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group notice are created in accordance with the video of the group notice.

In the process of incorporating the lottery in step S906, data about various lottery related to the group notice such as the group notice lottery is created. In the process of incorporating the lottery, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the group notice is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lottery executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed by the group notice.

In the sound incorporating step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creating step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed by the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, various luminance data such as light emission, blinking, and extinguishing in the lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice are created.

In the process of incorporating the lamp in step S910, various brightness data such as light emission, blinking, and extinguishing of lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation process are used as software for lamp reproduction executed in pachinko game 1. It is incorporated in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery, video, sound data, and the like related to the group notice effect are created and incorporated as software so as to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video production)
The main video production process of the group notice will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43. 39 to 43 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 39, first, in STEP 1, a character image used in the group notice is prepared. For example, in the group notice, the main character Yumemu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show the mode in which Yumemu-chan runs. It should be noted that such a character image is created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP2, using the moving image creation tool, a moving image in which the character steps on the four character images g1 to g4 is created. For example, when the video creation tool is started, the timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or a plurality of layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order such as layers 1, 2, 3 ... From the top, and the more the layers are arranged above (that is, the younger the number), the more the image is displayed on the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is designed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the values desired by the user.

In STEP2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a predetermined layer column. For example, in the example shown in (a), the character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to the layer 1 to form the moving image data A1 to A4. According to the moving image data A1 to A4, it is a stepping motion of a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of the moving image data A1 to A4 for stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the moving image for the character to step on is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, the stepping motion is created for the other characters by the same work.

As shown in FIG. 40, in STEP3, a moving image in which the character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X-axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY-axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. In both the X-axis and the Y-axis, the value corresponding to the center position is 0. Therefore, the screen size is −400 ≦ X ≦ 400 and −320 ≦ Y ≦ 320.

By using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width at which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), a setting screen 730 dedicated to the character A (Yumemu-chan) is shown, and on the setting screen 730, the stepping moving image data A1 of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is shown. One cycle of ~ A4 is set to 500, and it is set to move linearly on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500.

As shown in FIG. 41, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters progress is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), moving image data in which the character Jam-chan used for the group notice moves linearly on the X-axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created by the same creation procedure.

As described above, when moving image data that linearly moves on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created for a plurality of characters, as shown in (b), the moving image data of each character is placed on different layers. Deploy.

By using the setting screen 730 of the moving image creation tool, it is possible to set not only the width on the X-axis in which the moving image data moves, but also the position on the Y-axis and the position on the Z-axis of the character. For example, in the example shown in (b), a setting screen 730 dedicated to character B (jam-chan) is shown, and in the setting screen 730, the range of -100 ≦ Y ≦ -100, that is, the Y axis. The character is set to be fixed at the position of -100 above. By shifting the position of the Y-axis between the characters in this way, the position on the Y-axis where the character appears can be shifted. The Z axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen are input. It is possible to design the effect of the group notice (Boingo group notice of the present embodiment) so that the character moves between the side and the side.

As shown in FIG. 42, in STEP 5, the speed (display time) of the character can be adjusted. For example, if the width of the object of the moving image data is increased as in the example of the character A, the character becomes slower. That is, the longer the moving image data is, the slower the moving speed from one side of the screen to the other side of the screen, and the longer the time for the character to be displayed on the screen. Further, when the width of the object of the moving image data is reduced as in the example of the character B, the character becomes faster. That is, the shorter the moving image data, the faster the moving speed from one side of the screen to the other side of the screen, and the shorter the time for the character to be displayed on the screen.

Even if the moving speed of the character is changed by expanding or contracting the width of the object of the moving image data, the content of the moving image data does not change. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), for character A, moving image data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles is used, but even if the moving image data is expanded or contracted, the moving image data is A1. ~ A4 is composed of data repeated for 3 cycles. Specifically, when the moving image data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles is stretched, each data in A1 to A4 repeated for three cycles is stretched evenly. Further, when the moving image data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles is shrunk, each data in A1 to A4 repeated for three cycles is shrunk evenly.

Not limited to the above-mentioned example, when the moving speed of the character is changed by expanding / contracting the width of the object of the moving image data, the content of the moving image data may be changed according to the expansion / contraction. Specifically, when the moving image data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for 3 cycles is extended, the data of A1 to A4 are newly added in addition to the data of A1 to A4 repeated for 3 cycles, for example, A1. ~ A4 may be the moving image data repeated for 4 cycles. Further, when the moving image data in which A1 to A4 are repeated for 3 cycles is shrunk, some data is deleted from each data of A1 to A4 repeated for 3 cycles. For example, A1 to A4 are for 2 cycles. It may be repeated moving image data.

As described in STEP 4 and STEP 5 described above, by changing the position of the object of the video data of each character or changing the width of the object of the video data, the video data for the group preview effect is created. Can be done. For example, in STEP 6, the moving image data is arranged so that the character A appears before the character B and the display time of the character A is longer than the display time of the character B.

As shown in FIG. 43, in STEP 7, a moving image of the group notice is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), by arranging the moving image data of six types of characters such as characters A to F on the timeline of the layer, the moving image of the group notice is completed.

Further, if the length of the moving image data on the timeline is changed, the animation itself changes the speed at which the character moves while maintaining the moving image in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. Can be done. For example, the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is the moving image data in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles, like the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. , The length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged in the layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged in the layer 9. As a result, the character C arranged in the layer 10 advances on the screen at a faster speed than the character C arranged in the layer 9 while maintaining the same animation as the character C arranged in the layer 9. ..

In the 6-person group notice, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, also in the example shown in FIG. 43A, moving image data of a plurality of characters are not arranged on the timeline at the same timing and at the same length.

Further, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of sand smoke is arranged on the layer 1 located on the backmost side, the moving image of sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters progress.

As described above, it is possible to create moving image data of a group notice in which a plurality of characters progress. In the actual creation of the video data of the group notice, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 covers the screen. The video data of the group notice is created with the area corresponding to the position covered with a mask. Further, the group notice moving image data is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that the screen can be applied to a size larger than a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches).

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the 6-person group notice. As shown in FIG. 44, in the 6-person group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which 6 characters such as maid A to maid F progress as a group is displayed. The group notice effect is not limited to the six characters, but the appearance of a plurality of each character makes it possible to display the largest number of characters among the effects that can be performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Maid A to Maid F all wear the same or substantially the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the type of character other than recognizing by face. In the present embodiment, the design of the apron worn by each character is different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Maid A is Yume-chan, who is the main character, and Maid B is Jam-chan, who is the next highest priority character of Yume-chan, who is the main character.

In the 6-person group notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, face or foot) does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 6 maids A (Yumemu-chan) will appear, but 5 of them have visible faces. That is, the face of one of the six maids A appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids B (Jam-chan) will appear, but 4 of them have visible faces. That is, the face of one of the five maids B appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids C will appear, of which 3 maids C can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid C do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids D will appear, of which 3 maids D can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid D do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids E will appear, of which 3 maids E can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid E do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids F will appear, of which 3 maids F can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid F do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice effect are the character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and the character in which a part of the whole body (for example, the face) does not fit in the display area of the screen. This includes a character in which other parts of the whole body (for example, a part other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice production are characters of low importance in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as maids C to F, and maid A (Yumemu-chan) and maid B (jam-chan). Including characters that are more important than maids C to F in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1, maids A and B have a whole body that does not fit in the display area of the screen as compared to maids C to F. The proportion of parts other than the face that fit in the display area of the screen and are displayed is low. That is, the maid A and the maid B are designed to have a higher proportion of maids appearing while showing their faces than the maids C to F.

(Display priority)
FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the priority of display in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 45, in the group notice effect, an auxiliary display (effect display) that emphasizes that the character is progressing is performed. In the present embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as an auxiliary display. Displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, more effectively following the progressing character, can make the player feel as if the character's progress is causing sand smoke, and so on. It is possible to emphasize the mode in which the character runs through. As shown in FIG. 43 (b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is an auxiliary display, is arranged on the layer 1 located on the rearmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the image of sand smoke is located on the back side of any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, since the layer on which the image of the maid E is arranged is on the front side of the layer on which the image of the maid C is arranged, the image of the maid E is from the image of the maid C. Is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the image of the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is located on the back side of both the image of the maid E and the image of the maid C.

In this way, when the display of the maid E and the display of the maid C overlap, the display of the maid E has priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is used. When the display of the maid C overlaps with the display of the maid C, the display of the maid C has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E.

Further, the display layer of the characters (maids A to F) in the group notice effect has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced decorative pattern. Therefore, the image of the character in the group notice effect is displayed on the front side of the image of the decorative pattern displayed in a reduced size. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the character in the group notice effect is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the reduced decorative pattern.

On the other hand, the character display layer in the group notice effect has a lower priority than the small symbol display layer. Therefore, the image of the character in the group notice effect is displayed on the back side of the image of the small pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the character in the group notice effect is displayed so as to pass through the back side of the small symbol.

In this way, since the character in the group notice effect is displayed as an image so as to pass through the front side of the reduced decorative pattern, the group notice effect can be made more dynamic. On the other hand, since the image is displayed so as to pass through the back side of the small symbol by the character in the group advance notice effect, the visibility of the fluctuation of the symbol in the reach effect can be ensured, and as a result, the group advance notice effect is preferably performed. Can be provided.

In addition, in the image display period in the group notice effect, the decorative pattern reduced by the character display in the group notice effect is hidden during the period in which the reduced display is hidden by the character display in the group notice effect. It is longer than no period. As a result, the time for which the screen including the image of the decorative pattern is filled by the character in the group notice effect becomes longer, and the group notice effect can be made more dynamic.

Further, the display layer of sand smoke, which is an effect attached to the character in the group notice effect, has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced decorative pattern. Therefore, the effect image of the sand smoke in the group notice effect is displayed on the front side of the reduced decorative pattern image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the effect image of sand smoke in the group notice effect is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the reduced decorative pattern.

In this way, since the effect image of sand smoke in the group notice effect is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the reduced decorative pattern, the group notice effect can be made more dynamic.

The cut-in display may be performed while the design is changing, such as during reach. The cut-in display is a display that encourages whether or not the changing symbol becomes a big hit symbol. When the cut-in display is performed, another image is interrupted and displayed in the displayed image. It is also possible to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit with the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when it is green. Further, the display layer of the group notice effect may be the same as the display layer of the cut-in effect generated during the execution of the reach effect.

In this way, by providing an image in the cut-in display displayed on the same layer as the image in the group advance notice effect separately from the image display layer in the group advance notice effect, some trouble in the image in the group advance notice effect ( For example, even if there is a display problem (such as the image in the group notice effect being displayed on the front side of the 4th symbol), the image in the group notice effect that had the problem is replaced with the image in the cut-in display. It is possible to eliminate problems in the screen display.

(Motion blur processing)
FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur process used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 46, in the group notice effect, motion blur processing is applied to the progressing character. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character). By performing motion blur processing on the display of a progressing character, an afterimage of the character is displayed after the progressing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a dynamic group notice effect. Further, when the image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps with the image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for the one character is performed so as not to impair the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspect of contour when characters overlap)
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining an aspect of contours when characters overlap in a group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 47, in the group notice effect, one character may overtake another character. At that time, when the display of the character to be overtaken and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the character to be overtaken is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid F overtakes the maid F. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid F, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid F.

Further, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid D overtakes the maid D. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid D, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid D.

When one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to thickening the outline of one character, but the size of one character may be increased or the brightness of one character may be higher than the brightness of another character. It may be displayed with one character emphasized more than the other characters by increasing the height or making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of the other characters.

(Display on the screen of the image display device)
FIG. 48 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group notice effect. As shown in FIGS. 45 to 47 described above, since the gaming board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is invisible. However, as shown in FIG. 48, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

Here, in FIG. 48, as shown in (a), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is the first. The second, which is displayed more than the situation, and the whole of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not displayed yet, while a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will be. Further, the first displayed character (maid A) and the second displayed character (maid B) have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display are displayed. This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking through the device 5. That is, FIG. 48 is a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the game board 2 is an image display device. Even if the edge of the screen of 5 is covered, the whole maid A (Yumemu-chan) who is the main character is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the first displayed maid A is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than the first situation, and 2 The second situation is that while the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

(Example of failure in this video production process)
As shown in FIGS. 43 (b) and 48, in this video production process, the second character B appears shortly after the character A appears so that the first character A running at the top is not isolated. As such, the moving image data of each character is arranged. Here, an example will be given of how the screen looks when the arrangement of the moving image data fails in the present video production process.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a failure example in this video production process. For example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (a), when the moving image data of the second character B is arranged apart from the moving image data of the first character A, it is shown in FIGS. 49 (b) to 49 (d). As shown in FIG. 49 (e), the character B finally appears after a while after the character A appears and the body of the character A is completely visible. In such a case, it looks as if one character A has appeared alone, and it does not look like a group notice effect.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), in the present video production process, since the moving image data is arranged so that the first character A running at the top is not isolated, a plurality of characters are interspersed. Animations that appear one after another and run through without being vacant will be displayed, and by progressing as a group of multiple characters, the group notice production can be a powerful production.

(Overview of Baku Chu Mondai Notice)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. As shown in FIG. 50, in the Baku Chu group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which characters such as Baku Chu progress as a group is displayed.

In the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and may protrude. In some cases.

As described above, in the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the moving image data of the Baku Chu Mondai notice is created by arranging the image of the animation in which one kind of character moves on the screen. The moving image data in the Baku Chu Mondai notice is also created based on the work process shown in FIGS. 38 to 43 by the same method as the moving image data in the 6-person group notice.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group notice production)
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a luminance data table in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 51, the group notice production (6 person group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo group notice) includes the first display period (1000 msec), the second display period (1310 msec), and the third display period (830 msec). It is divided into.

The first display period is a period from the first start of the character display in the group notice effect to the first end of the character display. More specifically, the first display period is a period from the first appearance of any character in the group notice effect to the first disappearance of any character. For example, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character progresses at the top as it is, the period until the one character disappears is the first display period. Alternatively, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character is overtaken by another character, the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen is the first display period. .. In the present embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second appearing character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which the state in which the display of the new character starts and ends continues. More specifically, in the second display period, after any character disappears first in the group notice effect, a state in which new characters appear one after another continues, and the last character appears. It is the period until it appears. The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Further, in the second display period, the number of characters appearing is larger than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of the character ends without starting the display of the new character. More specifically, the third display period is a period from the appearance of the last character in the group notice effect to the disappearance of all the characters. The character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, and may be a character that is omitted by the character that appears last. The third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the effect sound of the effect sound is started in the first display period. The volume is raised to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50, with respect to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, the volume is the minimum (for example, mute or the lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases gradually. It reaches the specified value and is maintained at the specified value (for example, set volume or maximum volume) thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. After that, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at a specified value, and then gradually decreases to the minimum.

It should be noted that the stepwise increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value in the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the process in which the volume gradually decreases from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as volume fade-out. In the present embodiment, the fade-in time from the output of the effect sound in the first display period to the increase in the volume of the effect sound from the minimum to the specified value decreases the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from the beginning to the minimum volume of the effect sound.

The luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light. The plurality of light emitting means are frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric. Includes game effect lamps such as Chu Lamp 9H, Stick Controller Lamp 9J, and Trigger Button Lamp 9K. The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period, a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. .. That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 emits light, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and is included in the second brightness data table in the second display period. The predetermined game effect lamp 9 emits light, blinks, or turns off based on the brightness data, and in the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 emits light, blinks, or turns off based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of 6-person notice at stage A)
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the 6-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the 6-person group notice is executed from the 1600th frame during the pre-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The 6-person group notice starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the latter half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames) (2331th frame). The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half of the total variation time (6149 frames) (about 3074th frame) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). (The second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the 6-person notice is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. .. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of SP reach or the final reach, from the start of variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is a lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the 6-person group notice may be started in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in the stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The Baku Chu Mondai notice starts from the 66600msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the latter half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th ram) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frame) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frame). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). Timing (second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 26 which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). Timing (second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. No. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or in the final reach, from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice within the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 emits / blinks / turns off one or a plurality of lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for making the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output. In the following, the control of light emission / blinking / extinguishing of a lamp such as an LED by the effect control CPU 120 is also referred to as lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to emit / blink / turn off each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled by the lamp based on the luminance data received from the effect control CPU 120. Each game effect lamp 9 emits light / blinks / turns off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a luminance data table in which the luminance data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The luminance data table includes an error luminance data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach luminance data table used during SP reach, and a background luminance data table.

Further, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed, and the high accuracy and high base state (probability variation). Includes a luminance data table for probabilistic backgrounds used in (state).

Each of the above-mentioned background luminance data tables is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any of a plurality of types of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a probability variation state. Depending on whether or not, one of the background luminance data tables is used. That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs the luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is ramp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Further, each of the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background has a priority when used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, the priority is high when the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background are used in this order.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 develops into SP reach while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in a normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the SP reach is used as the normal background. The luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach luminance data table by preferentially using the luminance data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 develops into SP reach when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table, the mode corresponding to SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the lamp. During the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but it is usually after the SP reach is completed. When it returns to the state, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a big hit and the fanfare state is reached, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver. It is output.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control while measuring the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control by a timer, and is an LED driver. However, when it develops into SP reach or the like, the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the luminance data table for background, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the timer value without stopping the time counting of the lamp control using the background luminance data table. That is, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the luminance data included in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data included in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach is completed, the effect control CPU 120 starts to output the luminance data included in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Further, for example, when an error occurs while the effect control CPU 120 is outputting luminance data based on the SP reach luminance data table during SP reach, the error luminance data table corresponding to the error is SP reach. It is used with priority over the luminance data table for error, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the luminance data table for error. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table, the game effect is handled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. The lamp 9 is lamp controlled. During the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but the error is cleared and the SP reach is in progress again. When the game state is returned to, the luminance data based on the SP reach luminance data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 tells the LED driver the luminance data table for the SP reach corresponding to the SP reach while measuring the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach under control by a timer. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the timer value without stopping the time counting of the lamp control using the SP reach luminance data table. That is, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach Since the luminance data included in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data included in the error luminance data table, the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. Then, after the error is cleared, the effect control CPU 120 starts to output the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 55 to 81, the luminance data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 controls various light emitting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These luminance data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the light emitting portion of the game effect lamp according to the display in the group notice based on the luminance data stored in the luminance data table. In the present embodiment, the light emitting portion literally refers to a portion that emits light, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the emitting lamp is located is referred to as a light emitting portion, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not emitting light (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the light emitting point. In another example, the light emitting portion refers to a portion that emits light with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that emits light with high brightness is located emits light. A place where a lamp emitting light with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light emitting place is located may not be called a light emitting place.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as an element) for causing the lamp to emit light or turn off is defined by the luminance data table, and in such a luminance data table, the data storage area referred to by a specific lamp is used. If 0 data (for example, "000" data corresponding to RGB) is stored, the specific lamp is turned off. Further, when the data storage area referred to by the specific lamp does not exist in the luminance data table, or the luminance data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a luminance data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB are stored in the data storage area referenced by the specific lamp. If is stored, the specific lamp emits light. For example, when a specific effect such as a big hit notice effect is executed at the time of an effect corresponding to a normal background, the specific lamp is referred to in the specific effect. Even if the data of a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if the data of a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referred to in the effect corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp emits light. Will be done.

(Parent table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 55, in the parent table in the group warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the group notice effect is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 3140 msec so as to match the group notice effect.

Further, the parent table in the group warning luminance data table stores information for designating child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, UD1, AD1) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

(Child table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 56, in the child table in the group advance notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 90 to 91 and 146 to 148, which will be described later), among the periods in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is about W1 and the accessory lamp 9A is about. A grandchild table of Y1, L1 for the left lamp 9B, U1 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 51.

In the second display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150 described later) in the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W2 is used for the frame lamp and Y2 is used for the accessory lamp 9A. A grandchild table of L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 51.

In the third display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 94, 95, 151, 152, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W3, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y3. A grandchild table of L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG. 51.

As shown in FIG. 56, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the combination in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: an object lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect (for example, near the appearance of the character in the group notice effect), but since it is not used in the group notice effect, its grandchild table Is not prepared. Since the V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V prize can be generated is in progress or that a V prize has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, in the group notice production. This is because if the light is emitted, the player may mistakenly think that he or she has won a V prize or is a big hit. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group notice production. Not. The V lamp 9G may be provided at another position such as the vicinity of the left lamp 9B on the board as a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect, but even in this case, the group notice effect is also provided. It may not be used in.

Further, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are located at positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group advance notice effect (for example, the character advances in the group advance notice effect). However, since it is not used in the group notice production, its grandchildren's table is not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J emits light to encourage an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A in an operation effect (effect shown in FIG. 127 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K emits a PUSH effect (FIG. 88 described later). Since it is a lamp that emits light to encourage an operation of pressing the push button 31B in the effect shown in a19), the player can operate the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B if the lamp emits light in the group notice effect. This is because the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group notice production in order to avoid such inconvenience. The stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions such as near the left panel lamp 9B as positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect. However, it may not be used in the group notice production.

The features of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used for the grandchild table in the group notice production are summarized below. Specifically, the number of high-luminance light emitting points is larger in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 controls light emission at equal intervals at 100 msec, while W2 controls light emission at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and for W3, 10 msec with respect to the frame left lamp 9L. While light emission control is performed at short intervals, light emission control is performed at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the light emission pattern, the brightness data is specified so that W1 emits light with high brightness while moving the light emission points according to the traveling direction of the group notice, while W2 emits light with high brightness over a plurality of points. Luminance data is specified so that, for W3, both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or emit light at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice. There is. Regarding the first luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that all the lamps are turned off or emit light at low luminance in W1, whereas the W2 and W3 emit light at high luminance at a predetermined emission point. Luminance data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the final luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that the W3 turns off all the lamps or emits light with low luminance for both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the luminance data loop, the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W1 and W3, whereas the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W2. W1 and W3 are specified for the 10-minute luminance data for defect countermeasures, whereas W2 is not specified.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. Further, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified. Further, in W1, the first luminance data obtained by combining the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or emitting light with low luminance and the data for causing each lamp to emit light with high luminance for each time is used. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or emitting light with low luminance and the data for causing each lamp to emit light with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R" for all the lamps included in the frame lamp, and "G" and "G" and " "0" indicating that the light is turned off is specified in "B". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89 (a22) and 146 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or emit light with low brightness. It will be like. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on. In the present embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by emitting light mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is defined in "R", and "G" and "B" are specified. "0" is specified to indicate that the light is off, but for example, when each lamp emits mainly green light, "1" is specified to indicate low brightness in "G", and "R" and "B" are specified. It suffices if "0" indicating extinguishing is specified in, and when each lamp emits mainly blue light, "1" indicating low brightness is specified in "B" and extinguished in "R" and "G". It suffices if "0" indicating is specified.

Further, in W1, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the lamps that emit high-intensity light from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp are evenly spaced at 100 msec from T1-2 to T1-10. Luminance data is specified to move with. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 corresponds to the part where the character appears in the group notice, and the brightness data is generated so that the part of the lamp that emits high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character advances. It is stipulated. The left frame lamp is initially turned off or emits light at low brightness, and gradually increases as the location of the lamp that emits high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified so that it emits light with luminance. On the other hand, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8, which initially emit light with high brightness, are turned off or emit light with low brightness as the portion of the lamp that emits light with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified in. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 and 146 to 148, which will be described later, the frame lamp is also from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character appears from the right end of the screen and progresses in the group notice. The position where the light is emitted with high brightness changes toward the left side.

Further, in W1, the data including data for causing one frame lamp to emit light with high brightness and extinguishing another frame lamp adjacent to the one frame lamp is included, and the brightness is such that the portion of the lamp that emits light gradually moves. The data is specified. As a result, in W1, the location of the lamp that emits light with high brightness can be moved according to the direction in which the character travels.

Further, in W1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely high in brightness according to the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the frame lamp when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it emits light at.

Here, if this 10-minute data is not provided, the lamp emission control is performed again from T1-1 when the emission control is performed using W1 and the lamp does not shift to W2 due to some abnormality. Even though the character of the group notice has already appeared and is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, it is high again from the vicinity of the frame right lamp 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10. The part of the lamp that emits light with brightness moves, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. However, in the present embodiment, since the data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, even if the light emission control is performed using W1 and the light emission is not transferred to W2 due to some abnormality, the data is set in 10 minutes. Since the frame lamp can be made to emit light in a light emitting mode suitable for the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness. Then, if the abnormality is resolved in these 10 minutes, the player can continue the game without any particular discomfort.

In W1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the emission control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

Further, the luminance data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures specified in W1 is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps emit light in order so that the light emitting part deviates from the state of the previous T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is stored for each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. It is stipulated. Further, in W2, the first luminance data, which is a combination of the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or for emitting light with low luminance and the data for causing each lamp to emit light with high luminance, and the first luminance data for each hour. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or emitting light with low luminance and the data for causing each lamp to emit light with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W2, a lamp that emits light with high brightness sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that causes one frame lamp to emit light with high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to emit light with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W2, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to emit high-luminance light over a plurality of locations. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the frame lamp is set according to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. Will sparsely emit high-intensity light. Further, W2 is designed to emit more frame lamps with higher brightness than W1.

In W2, unlike W1, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided, so that the luminance control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the light emission control of the lamp is performed again from T2-1 when the light emission control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality, the frame lamp is sparsely high. Since the mode of emitting light with brightness is merely repeated, it does not give a feeling of strangeness to the player in particular.

Further, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all of the data referred to for each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10, but the time for creating each data. Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which is very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of the present embodiment, by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10 to control the light emission, only one set of data that is repeatedly referred to can be created. The time efficiency can be improved. The reason why the light emission control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data in the second display period in the group notice effect is that the second display period in the group notice effect is larger than the first display period and the third display period. Since the second display period is long and the second display period is a time zone in which the screen is filled with a plurality of characters and the plurality of characters proceed as a group, light emission corresponding to such an effect is emitted. This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same light emission as the embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 57 (c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is transmitted to the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. It is stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrow, the lamps emitting high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 gradually turn off or gradually decrease from T3-2 to T3-30. Increase the number of lamps that are turned off or emit light at low brightness so that they emit light at brightness. Further, for T3-7 to T3-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 80 msec, whereas the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances in the group notice. For ~ 9L12, the brightness data is specified so that the brightness is changed from high brightness to low brightness or low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 94, 95, 151, and 152, which will be described later, the frame lamp also changes from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned off or the light is emitted at low brightness will be changed.

Further, in W3, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or emit light at low luminance at the time of transition to T3-30. Further, in W3, similarly to W1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or emits light at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emitting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

In W3, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting as described above is defined, the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38 is repeatedly used to prevent the emission control. ..

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 58, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "RRRR". Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "6" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. It should be noted that the monochromatic LED has less filters that block light than the full-color LED, so that the spectrum is strongly emitted. Therefore, the monochromatic LED has a smaller luminance data corresponding to the higher luminance than the full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals at 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In Y1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89 (a22) and 146 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or have low brightness. It will emit light. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is adjusted to the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emitting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that light is sparsely emitted with high brightness.

In Y1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the emission control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In Y2, the lamp that emits light with high brightness sparsely (randomly) changes, including the brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light with high brightness and the other lamp adjacent to the lamp to emit light with high brightness. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are arranged in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9A emits light with sparsely high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in Y2 as in Y1, the luminance control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in Y3, similarly to Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the accessory lamp 9A emits light at a low brightness so that there is no sense of discomfort in the light emission mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next production is performed.

In Y3, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures as described above is defined, the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a left lamp in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 59, the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "WWWWWW". Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "6" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89 (a22) and 146 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or have low brightness. It will emit light. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the panel left lamp 9B is set according to the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that light is sparsely emitted with high brightness.

In L1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the left panel lamp 9B over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In L2, the lamp that emits light with high brightness sparsely (randomly) changes, including the brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light with high brightness and the other lamp adjacent to the lamp to emit light with high brightness. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the left side of the board is adjusted to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9B emits light with sparsely high brightness.

In L2, unlike L1, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided, so that the luminance control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in L3, similarly to L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the panel left lamp 9B emits light with low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emitting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next production is started.

In L3, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures as described above is defined, the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (in this example). It is an LED (3 colors of R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number of "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "6" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the on-board lamp 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 60A, in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89 (a22) and 146 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C are turned off or have low brightness. It will emit light. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is adjusted to the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emitting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that light is sparsely emitted with high brightness.

In U1, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting as described above is defined, the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the on-board lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In U2, the lamp that emits light with high brightness sparsely (randomly) changes, including the brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light with high brightness and the other lamp adjacent to the lamp to emit light with high brightness. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are grouped on the board in the group notice effect. The lamp 9C will sparsely emit light with high brightness.

In U2, unlike U1, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided, so that the luminance control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 60 (c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in U3, similarly to U1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or emits light at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emitting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next production is started.

In U3, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures as described above is defined, the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

In any of U1, U2, and U3, only the data of "0" is specified for the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, which are monochromatic. That is, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group notice effect.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is from "0" to "0". Brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number of "F". "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "6" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the V attacker lamp 9F, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89 (a22) and 146 (b43) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are turned off at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect. Or it will emit light at low brightness. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in A1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, each lamp has sparsely high brightness according to the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the light emission mode of each lamp when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it emits light at.

In A1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 61 (b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Has been done.

In A2, the lamp that emits light with high brightness sparsely (randomly) changes, including the brightness data that causes one lamp to emit light with high brightness and the other lamp adjacent to the lamp to emit light with high brightness. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 92, 93, 149, and 150, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the attacker lamps match the appearance of the characters forming a group in the group notice effect. The 9E, the electric Chu lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F sparsely emit high-intensity light.

In A2, unlike A1, the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided, so that the luminance control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 61 (c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in A3, as in A1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker so that there is no discomfort in the light emitting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F when shifting to the next production. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp 9F is turned off or emits light at low luminance.

In A3, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures as described above is defined, the luminance control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 62, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the reach line effect is defined.

Unlike the group notice effect, the reach line effect is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative pattern will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and it is a game that the reach is reached. It is a production that suggests (or informs) the person. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87 and 134 to 137, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a flash of light. , The reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (in the left-right direction) so as to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table in the reach line luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec so as to match the reach line effect.

Further, the parent table in the reach line luminance data table stores information for designating child tables (WD11, YD11, LD11, UD11, AD11) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

(Child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 63, in the child table in the reach line luminance data table, the time of the reach line effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (luminance data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the period during which the reach line effect is executed, the period during which the flash occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 84 (a8), (a9) and 134 (a8), (a9) described later) is a frame. A grandchild table of W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the left panel lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Of the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 85 and 135 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the left panel lamp. A grandchild table of L12 is provided for each of 9B. Since the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used during the period when the reach line is generated, the grandchild table is not prepared.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (shown in FIGS. 86 (a13) to 87 (b17) and FIGS. 136 (a13) to 137 (b17) described later). During the production period), a grandchild table of W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the left panel lamp 9B, U13 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line disappears (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 87 (a18) and 137 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14 and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the left board lamp 9B, U14 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 63, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, the frame left in any of the period in which the flash occurs, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward, and the period in which the reach line disappears. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the brightness data table referred to during the period when the reach line is generated, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of brightness data tables are provided.

As described above, in the reach line effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect or a smaller number of lamps than the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 64A, in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line production is a production that suggests to the player that it has reached the reach, and is not a production that arouses the player's expectation by suggesting a big hit like the group notice production. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate light emission control such as providing different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually as in the group notice effect. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group advance notice effect, it is elaborate to provide different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually as in the group advance notice effect. Instead of controlling the light emission, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a8) and 134 (b8), which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp emit light with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ..

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 135, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it emits light at.

As shown in FIG. 64 (c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it emits light at.

As shown in FIG. 64 (d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, the luminance data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a18) and 137 (b18) described later, the frame lamp is turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the grandchild table Y11, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a8) and 134 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A emit light with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the grandchild table Y12, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 135, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A emit light with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the grandchild power strip Y13, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A emit light with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 65 (d), in the grandchild table Y14, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a18) and 137 (b18) described later, the accessory lamp 9A is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a reach line luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 66A, in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a8) and 134 (b8), which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B emit high-intensity at the timing when the flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 135, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B emit light with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 66 (c), in the grandchild table L13, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B emit light with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 66 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a18) and 137 (b18) described later, the left panel lamp 9B is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the grandchild table U11, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a8) and 134 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, among the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are used. Luminance data is specified so that it emits light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the grandchild table U13, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 emit high-intensity light while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified as such.

As shown in FIG. 67 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a18) and 137 (b18) described later, the on-board lamp 9C is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". "To" F "represents the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a8) and 134 (b8) described later, at the timing of flash generation, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are bright so as to emit high brightness. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the grandchild power strip A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T13 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 136 described later, the luminance data is defined so that the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F emit light with high luminance while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 68 (d), in the grandchild table A14, the luminance data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a18) and 137 (b18) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Parent table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 69, in the parent table in the background warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the background notice effect is defined.

The background notice effect is different from the group advance notice effect, and is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative pattern will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and is a specific character (for example, jam). Chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, the background of the starry sky).

In the parent table in the background notice luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec so as to match the background notice effect.

Further, the parent table in the background warning luminance data table stores information for designating child tables (WD21, YD21, LD21, UD21, AD21) referred to at the time of lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

(Child table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 70, in the child table in the background advance notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W21, the accessory lamp 9A is Y21, the board left lamp 9B is L21, the board lamp 9C is U21, and the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W22, the accessory lamp 9A is Y22, the board left lamp 9B is L22, the board lamp 9C is U22, and the attacker lamp 9E is A22. Each grandchild table is provided.

In the final 600,000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W23, the accessory lamp 9A is Y23, the board left lamp 9B is L23, the board lamp 9C is U23, and the attacker lamp 9E is A23. Each grandchild table is provided.

As shown in FIG. 70, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the background notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the accessory lamp 9A are used in any of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600,000 msec. , A board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp are provided with six types of brightness data tables.

As described above, in the background advance notice effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71 (c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is defined for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the grandchild table Y21, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 72 (b), in the grandchild table Y22, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 72 (c), in the grandchild Tave Y23, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a left lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73A, in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 73B, in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 73 (c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the grandchild table U22, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 74 (c), in the grandchild table U23, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". "To" F "represents the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F over T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is increased over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 75 (c), in the grandchild Tave A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is repeated at 240 msec and 230 msec over T23-1 to T23-6. Luminance data is specified for.

(Brightness data table at full emission)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of the luminance data table at the time of total emission. As shown in FIGS. 76A to 76H, in the total light emission brightness data table, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, High-brightness brightness data (the maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH production)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of the luminance data table at the time of PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that encourages an operation of pressing the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 88 (a19) described later.

FIG. 77A shows the luminance data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, luminance data is specified for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The emission color of the stick controller lamp 9J during the PUSH effect is the same color as the emission color emitted by the frame lamp or the like in the group notice effect (red in this example).

FIG. 77B shows the luminance data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, luminance data is specified for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The emission color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH effect is the same color as the emission color emitted by the frame lamp or the like in the group notice effect (red in this example).

(Child table in the group notice luminance data table related to the modified example)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modified example. As shown in FIG. 80, in the child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modification, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone. (Also called a luminance data table) is specified.

For example, in the period (2000 msec) until the middle of the first display period in the period in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W101, the accessory lamp 9A is Y101, the left panel lamp 9B is L101, and the on-board lamp. A grandchild table of U101 is provided for 9C and A101 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period (2790 msec) during the rest of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec) during the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W102 is used for the frame lamp and Y102 is used for the accessory lamp 9A. , L102 for the left board lamp 9B, U102 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modified example.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period of the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W103 is used for the frame lamp, Y103 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 is used for the left side lamp 9B, and U103 is used for the onboard lamp 9C. , And a grandchild table of A103 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modified example.

As described above, in the group advance notice brightness data table according to the modification, the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period in the first brightness data table, and during the first display period. The control of the game effect lamp 9 ends, and in the second brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 continues even during the second display period. Then, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period in the third brightness data table.

(Details of lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table)
As described above, the effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to emit / blink one or a plurality of the lamps among the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control. / Turn off.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 converts the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122 into the image data (moving image data, animation data) when the sub-variable time reaches the timing to start the display corresponding to each part (for example, reach display). Based on this, the display control of the image display device 5 is performed. The display control unit 124 sets an extended command corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extended command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124, based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 78, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the reach line based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124.

As described above, in the parent table, the information for designating the lamp (light emitting point) to be controlled by the lamps among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and the maximum time during which the lamp control is performed for each lamp. Information that specifies the child table and information that specifies the child table referenced during lamp control for each lamp (specified address of the child table) are stored. In the parent table, only the lamps that are the target of lamp control are specified, and the lamps that are not the target of lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 55 described above, a frame lamp, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp 9E are designated as lamp control targets, and each lamp is designated. 3140 msec is specified as the maximum time for lamp control. Then, in the parent table shown in FIG. 55, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the accessory lamp 9A, and the child table LD1 is designated for the board left lamp 9B. , The child table UD1 is designated for the on-board lamp 9C, and the child table AD1 is designated for the attacker lamp 9E.

To further explain an example, as described above, in the parent table of the reach line luminance data table shown in FIG. 62, 1500 msec is specified as the maximum time for lamp control for the frame lamp, and the effect control CPU 120 Decreases the counter by 1 every 10 msec in order to measure this 1500 msec. That is, the effect control CPU 120 clocks 1500 msec by executing the counter subtraction process 150 times. The effect control CPU 120 is adapted to perform lamp control using the child table designated by the parent table until the maximum time is 1500 msec. In the parent table of the reach line luminance data table, WD11 is designated as a child table for the frame lamp.

In the child table, information for specifying the lamp (lighting location) to be controlled by the lamp among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and the grandchild table referred to at each time when the lamp control is performed are specified. Information (specified address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, as described above, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 63, the grandchild tables (W11, W12, W13, W14) referred to for each time are designated.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the child table WD11 of the reach line brightness data table, 330 msec is specified as the time for which the lamp control is performed for the frame lamp, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the counter to 1 every 10 msec. By subtracting, 330 msec is clocked, and lamp control is performed using the grandchild table designated by the child table WD11 until the clock reaches 330 msec. In the child table WD11 of the reach line luminance data table, W11 is designated as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information for designating a lamp (lighting location) to be controlled by the lamps among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and luminance data used at each time when the lamps are controlled. ing. For example, as described above, in the grandchild table W11 shown in FIG. 64, the luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the luminance data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp to be controlled by the lamp. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B", and the luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output for each element. .. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 stages from 0 to F, and when the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F, the current value is the lowest value. The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when the luminance data of "A" is output to the element of "R", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the element of "R", and the element of "G" is "1". When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows to the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the "F" The current corresponding to the luminance data of "G" flows through the element of "G".

As shown in FIG. 78, in the grandchild table W11, “58A” and “123” are designated as luminance data (RGB data) at intervals of 30 msec for the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 clocks 330 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs luminance data at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W11 until the clock reaches 330 msec. Output to the LED driver. Then, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow to the designated LED based on the received luminance data. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can control the frame lamp with the LED driver via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a fixed cycle (for example, a 10 msec cycle), the parent table is used. Ramp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated place of the grandchild table, and when the output of the brightness data is completed up to the last designated place of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is output. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, the output of the brightness data is started again from the first specified location of the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table specifying the grandchild table becomes 0 while the effect control CPU 120 is outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, this time, the child table is concerned. Set the timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table that specifies, and start outputting the brightness data from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified in the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by managing a timer of a child table. As shown in FIG. 79, for convenience of explanation, the data “58A” in the first 30 msec is referred to as data 1, and the data “123” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 2.

The effect control CPU 120 clocks 330 msec specified by the child table WD11 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and data 1 and data 2 are measured at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W11 until the clock reaches 330 msec. The brightness data of the above is output to the LED driver, but after the data 1 to the data 2 are output, if the timekeeping has not reached 330 msec, the brightness data is output to the LED driver again in order from the first data 1. When the timekeeping reaches 330 msec, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting the luminance data based on the grandchild table W11 at that time, and starts outputting the luminance data based on the next grandchild table W11 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of the luminance data until the time specified by the child table elapses.

As in the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 57 described above, the brightness data is designated over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final designated location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table is stored in the grandchild table. When the value of the corresponding timer becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, so that the lamp control is prevented from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with a fixed light emission, so that it is possible to prevent a problem in which the lighting of the lamp continues to change. Can be done. Furthermore, if the luminance data for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change more effectively. can.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table related to modified example)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table according to the modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data are "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. "0" is the data corresponding to the extinguishing, and "1" to "F" are the data corresponding to the light emission. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance light emission, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance light emission, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and the last time T101-11. In, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is specified for each lamp from T102-1 to T102-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. In W102, a lamp that emits light with high brightness sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that causes one frame lamp to emit light with high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp to emit light with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W102, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to emit high-luminance light over a plurality of locations. As a result, in the group notice effect, the frame lamps sparsely emit light with high brightness according to the appearance of the characters advancing in a group in the group notice effect. Further, W102 is designed to emit more frame lamps with higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 81 (c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified over T103-7 to T103-38 at short intervals of 2 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T103-7 to T103-38 at long intervals of 14 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps emitting high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned off so as to emit light with low brightness. Or increase the number of lamps that emit light at low brightness. Further, for T103-7 to T103-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 14 msec, whereas in the group notice, the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances. For ~ 9L12, the brightness data is specified so that the brightness is changed from high brightness to low brightness or low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. As a result, the position of the frame lamp is turned off or emitted at low brightness from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice.

Further, in W103, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or emit light at low luminance at the time of transition to T103-30. Further, in W103, similarly to W101, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or emits light at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the light emitting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 167, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In the present embodiment, an effect mode in which any of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice is selected will be described. Further, in the figure, how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks is shown by hatching.

(Direction mode in stage A)
The effect mode in the stage A will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 104.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image in which the maid A (Yumemu-chan) is flying is displayed as the character appearing in the stage A. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the character “x2” indicating that the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 82 (a3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a4), when the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the character "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 83 (a5). , The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a7), a decorative pattern for producing a reach line is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 84 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. In the state shown in FIG. 84 (a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp emit light with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes large, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 85 (a12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 85, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 87 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen further shrinks, the reach line in the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 87 (a18), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 88 (a19) when the 6-person group notice is executed, and FIG. 97 when the background notice is executed. The effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 98 (a111), and when the lamp advance notice is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 98 (a111).

As mentioned above, the 6-person group notice is a production that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and 6 characters dressed as maids are grouped. It is a production that progresses as a maid. The background notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or the decorative figure becomes a predetermined jackpot pattern, and a specific character (for example, a character such as a protagonist, a rare character, etc.) is specified. This is an effect that is displayed together with the background (for example, the background of the starry sky). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special drawing or the decorative drawing becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A). Is a production that emits light or blinks. In the lamp notice, any one of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, or a plurality of lamps may emit light or blink, or a lamp provided other than the game effect lamp 9 emits light or emits light. It may blink.

In stage A, a group notice (for example, a 6-person group notice or a boingo group notice) is executed after the reach line effect of the previous fluctuation. For example, when the 6-person group notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 88 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 77. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K emit light or blink. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, emitting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and “PUSH! An effect occurs that erases the character image of "!". Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is completed by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the 6-person group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps emit high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to the display of the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a22), the notice of the 6-person group starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a23), the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) appears as the first (first) character in the first display period. The state shown in FIG. 89 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 48 (a), and while the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, has not yet been displayed, the maid A has not been displayed yet. It represents the first situation in which a part (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During the execution of the 6-person group notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIGS. 55 to 61. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to emit light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that emits high brightness moves. In addition, the meeting where the group notice production (6 people group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo notice described later) was executed, images other than the image related to the group notice production (for example, the background image and the image related to the SP reach first half notice production etc. ), The brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images lowered during the group notice production gradually returns to the original brightness in the third display period. On the other hand, for the player, the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, the active display area 5A, and the like. The display of information on games that are of high importance regarding the outcome and advantage of the game is given a high priority so that the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 51, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a24), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. The state shown in FIG. 89 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 48 (b), and while the entire maid A initially displayed has not yet been displayed, a part of the maid A is partially displayed. While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) that was displayed more than the first situation and was displayed second was not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 90 (a25), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 90 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second appearing character skips the first appearing character. As shown in FIG. 90 (a27), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a28), the character continues to advance, and eventually the second appearing character running at the top (top) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a29), the second appearing character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 91 (a30), the second appearing character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a31), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the frame lamps sparsely emit high-intensity light according to the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp emits light or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 92 (a32) to 93 (a36), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed together with other characters. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is emitted changes depending on the brightness. As shown in FIG. 94 (a37), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 once emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a38), the frame lamp starts to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 94 (a38), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 94 (a39), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 95 (a40) and 95 (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 95 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group notice effect ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 96, a comparative example of the 6-person group notice and the 6-person group notice according to the present embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 96 (a201), as in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 89 (a23), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed, but the maid A is concerned. This is the first situation in which a part of (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 89 (a24), the entire maid A initially displayed is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed in the second situation. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 96 (a202), the maid A continues to run without the appearance of the second maid B, and the entire maid A is displayed. Then, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 96 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs through the left side of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group notice effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 95, an animation in which a plurality of characters appear one after another without a gap and run through is displayed, so that the plurality of characters proceed as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful production. Further, since the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group advance notice effect from becoming too complicated. The number of characters overtaking other characters may be larger than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

When the background notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 97 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 77.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps emit high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (a103), as a background notice effect, a specific character (maid B (jam-chan) in this example) and a specific background (in this example, the background of the starry sky) and an image display device. It is displayed on the screen of 5. Further, during the effect of the background notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice.

When the lamp advance notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 98 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 77.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps emit high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (a113), the lamp advance notice is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, the accessory lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp notice.

After the third display period of the group notice has ended as shown in FIG. 95 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 97 (a103) and the lamp notice shown in FIG. 98 (a113) have ended, FIGS. 99 to 99 to As shown in FIG. 103, the symbol feed effect is executed. In the decorative symbol in the reach mode, the symbol feed effect determines whether or not the decorative symbol being variablely displayed (in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C) is stopped, and the ornament to be stopped. It is a production that encourages the player whether or not the symbol is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot symbol. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on a predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a43), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a44) to 100 (a48), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 101 (a49) to 102 (a54), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases, as shown in FIGS. 103 (a55) to 103 (a57). As shown, finally, the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 103 (a57), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 104 (a58) and 104 (a59), the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" which has become the reach mode by the effect effect called whiteout. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which is the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a59), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has become white due to whiteout is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

(Direction mode in the first half of SP reach)
The production mode in the first half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 113.

As shown in FIGS. 105 (a61) and 105 (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 105 (a63), the title of SP reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as the SP reach effect, a maid character such as Yumemu-chan catches the Baku Chu, so the title "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on a predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 106 (c1), when the production of the first half of the SP reach is executed, an image in which Maid A (Yumemu-chan) stands up is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (c2), an image in which the opponent's character (enemy character), Baku Chu, is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 106 (c3) to 107 (c5), an animation is displayed in which the maid A chases the escaping explosive chew.

As shown in FIG. 107 (c6), after the animation in which the maid A jumps on the explosion chew is displayed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c11) at the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 9). However, at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. In the case of shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c31).

When the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 107 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 108 (c11), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is a lost pattern "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (c12), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the loss mode is changed by the effect called blackout. As shown in FIG. 108 (c13), the image gradually becomes black, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in the lost mode are completely invisible. ..

After that, as shown in FIGS. 109 (c14) and 109 (c15), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 107 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 110 (c21), an image in which the maid A catches the explosion chew and gives a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. 3 "stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 110 (c22), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 110 (c23). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 111 (c24) and 111 (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 107 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c31). In the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c31), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is a lost pattern "4." "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (c32), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of “3”, “4”, and “3” which are in the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. Up to this point, the production is the same as when the SP reach is lost in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 108 (c11) and 108 (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 113 (c33), in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect of dropping the movable body 32, which did not occur when the loss occurs in the first half of the SP reach, is executed.

Then, in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23) after the effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c41), and the final effect is achieved. In the case of shifting to reach (in the case of fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c71). In this way, the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit includes a fluctuation pattern that shifts to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach by pretending that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach. As a result, from the player's point of view, once the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the player will shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Direction mode in the latter half of SP reach)
The production mode in the latter half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c33) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c41), the character image, the background image, and the like are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (c42), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by the blackout is gradually increased, the effect image of the latter half of the SP reach that has been switched on the back side appears. You will be able to see it. During the production of the latter half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c42), when the production of the latter half of the SP reach is executed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war on Baku Chu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 114 (c43) to 115 (c45), an animation is displayed in which the maid A and the maid B chase after the escaping explosion chew.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c46), after the animation in which the maid A and the maid B jump on the explosion chew is displayed, the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 12) is shown in FIG. 116 (c51). When shifting to the production and at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 23), shifting to the production shown in FIG. 118 (c61) and shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26). Shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c71).

When the loss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 115 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c51). In the production shown in FIG. 118 (c51), an image in which Maid A and Maid B are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and a lost pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the decorative pattern display area 5C in the center. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (c52), due to the blackout, the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened. As shown in FIG. 116 (c53), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 117 (c54) and 117 (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 115 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 118 (c61). In the production shown in FIG. 118 (c61), an image in which Maid A and Maid B catch the explosion chew and give a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. "3" stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 118 (c62), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 118 (c63). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c64) and 119 (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 120 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in the final reach)
The production mode in the final reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 131.

When shifting to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 115 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c71). When shifting to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black as shown in FIG. 121 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 121 (c72). Will be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c73), the effect of notifying the start of the final reach is executed, the face image of the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, and "Go! Character image is displayed. The effect display of the light as shown in FIG. 121 (c72) is the effect of the blackout shown in FIG. 121 (c71) and the effect of displaying the face image of the hero shown in FIG. 121 (c73). It is intentionally inserted in between. As a result, the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c72) can inform the player that the final reach will be achieved in an easy-to-understand manner.

After that, the production during the final reach is executed. During the production of the latter half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 122 (c74), an image in which the maid A gives a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 122 (c75) to 122 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at each of a plurality of timings, and an image of the entire sentence is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (c79). By doing so, the theme of the production performed in the final reach is shown. In this example, it is shown as "all set".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 124 (c80) to 125 (c85), an animation in which the character appearing in the final reach effect is introduced is displayed at each of a plurality of timings. For example, in this example, maid F, maid E, maid D, maid C, maid B, maid A, etc. appear in order from the supporting characters, and the main character has a high priority near the final (or the latter half). A character appears. In addition, characters with high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a high-priority character such as a hero appears at the beginning (or the first half) or near the final (or the latter half) so as to stand out more than a low-priority character such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (c86), when the final reach production is executed, an image is displayed in which the six characters who appeared in the notice of the six-person group are standing up and declaring war on Baku Chu. Will be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 126 (c87) to 127 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase after the escaping Baku Chu.

As shown in FIG. 127 (c90), after an animation in which six characters drive the explosive chew is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 127 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit during which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the characters "Close !!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 127 (c91), when the stick controller 31A is lost (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. (In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26) shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 129 (c111).

When the loss is confirmed in the final reach, the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 127 (c91), and then the process shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c101). In the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c101), an image in which six characters are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and a lost pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (c102), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. As shown in FIG. 128 (c103), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the normal background that has been switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 127 (c91) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 129 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 129 (c111), an image in which six characters are catching the explosion chew is displayed, and a big hit symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. Stop.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 129 (c112), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 129 (c113). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 130 (c114) and 130 (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 131 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in stage B)
The production mode in the stage B will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 152.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image of Baku Chu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the character “× 2” indicating that the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 132 (b3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b4), when the character "x3" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 133 (b5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 133 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 134 (b7), a decorative pattern for producing a reach line is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 134 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 62 to 68. The luminance data table shown in FIGS. 62 to 68 is the same as the luminance data table used in the reach line effect of the stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp emit light with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 134 (b9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 135 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode. The reach line appearing in the stage B may be the same as the reach line appearing in the stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, or the like, for example.

As shown in FIG. 135 (b11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 135 (b12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 135, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 136 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 136 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 136 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 136, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 137 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 137 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen further shrinks, the reach line in the center of the screen further shrinks in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen emit light with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 137 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 138 to 142. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on a predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b19), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 138 (b20) to 139 (b24), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 140 (b25) to 141 (b30), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and FIGS. 142 (b31) to (b33) show. As shown, finally, the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 142 (b33), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the pattern feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 143 (b34) and 143 (b35), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" in the reach mode is gradually whitened by the whiteout. Eventually, the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which became the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (b36), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has become white due to whiteout is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

As shown in FIGS. 144 (b37) and 144 (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 144 (b39), the title of SP reach (“Catch Baku Chu!”) Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on a predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, a bomb chew notice or a boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-variation is being displayed. For example, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach is displayed, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 145 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 77. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K emit light or blink. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, emitting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 145 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the explosion chew group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps emit high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 145 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to the display of the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 emits light or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b43), the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (b44), the entire character displayed first (first) is not yet displayed, but a part of the character displayed first (in this example, a part of the face). ) Is displayed, indicating the first situation.

During the execution of the Baku Chu Mondai notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIGS. 55 to 61. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 146 to 148, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to emit light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that emits high brightness moves.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 51, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first display period is started. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b45), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (b45), while the entire character displayed first is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation, and the second character is displayed. It represents the second situation in which the entire character displayed in is not yet displayed, while a part of the second displayed character (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 147 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. The display area on the screen used in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of "Catch Baku Chu!" In the SP first half title notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 148 (b49), the character continues to advance, and eventually the first displayed character running at the top reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 148 (b50), the first displayed character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 148 (b51), the first displayed character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 149 (b52), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, the frame lamps sparsely emit high-intensity light according to the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp emits light or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 149 (b52) to 150 (b57), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As the characters run from the left side to the right side of the screen as a group, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of "Catch the Baku Chu!". ..

As shown in FIG. 151 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed together with other characters. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is emitted changes depending on the brightness. As shown in FIG. 151 (b58), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 once emit light with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 151 (b59), the frame lamp starts to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (b59), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 151 (b60), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 151, as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!" Reappears step by step. At this time, if the SP first half title notice lottery is won, the SP first half title notice is given by changing the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!". .. For example, as shown in FIG. 144 (b39), before the Baku Chu group notice is executed, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display in the first half of the SP reach are white, but FIG. 150 (b56). After that, when the character image in the group notice is displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the title is displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or disappears. While the entire screen is covered with the character image in the group notice, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display change to red, and as shown in FIGS. 151 (b59) and (b60), the character in the group notice. Disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 152 (b61) and 152 (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 152 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group notice effect ends. After that, the process shifts to the production of the first half of the SP reach shown in FIG. 106 (c1).

(Boingo group notice)
The production mode of the Boingo group notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 162.

In the above-mentioned 6-person group notice and Baku Chu group notice, a plurality of characters proceed as a group from the right end to the left end of the screen. As described above, the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice were the effects of the character advancing in the X-axis direction in the XY plane shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, in the Boingo group notice, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group notice is a 3D effect in which the character progresses in the three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 153 to 158 are diagrams for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in the stage A. Even when the Boingo group is executed in the stage B, it is the same as the effect mode shown in FIGS. 153 to 158. Although not shown, the Boingo group notice effect also has a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, as in the case of the 6-person group notice effect and the Baku Chu group notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 153 (d1), the boingo group notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

During the execution of the Boingo group notice, for example, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIGS. 55 to 61. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to emit light with high brightness, and then the place of the lamp that emits light with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. In addition, the frame lamps sparsely emit high-intensity light as the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp emits light or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through.

As shown in FIG. 153 (d2), a pre-stage image by a light effect is displayed as a pre-stage effect before a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is the group appearance point where the character group appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (d3), the first character appears from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 154 (d4) and 154 (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 154 (d6), as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 155 (d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and proceed from the depth side to the front side of the screen, so that the entire screen is covered by the characters. As shown in FIGS. 156 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and progresses from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 157 (d13) and 157 (d14), as the last character progresses from the depth side to the front side of the screen, it covers most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end to the other end of the screen over a range, and the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 158 (d16) and 158 (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), when the last character disappears. The group notice production ends.

FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo group notice. FIGS. 159 (A) to 159 (F) correspond to FIGS. 153 (d3) to 154 (d6), FIGS. 155 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 159 (A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 159 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 159 (E) and 159 (F), even if the succeeding character image is placed at the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized, so that the succeeding character image must be placed. May be good.

Here, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice and the Boingo group notice according to the present embodiment are compared with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 160, a character (boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the previous image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 153 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the discomfort that the character suddenly appears large, it is necessary to create an animation so that the character is displayed small and gradually enlarged as shown in FIGS. 160 and 161. ..

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIGS. 160 (d101) to 161 (d105) is displayed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 153 (d3) as shown in FIG. 161 (d106). You have to go through it, which takes extra time to produce, and you have to create an image for animation. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 (d2) and 153 (d3), the pre-stage image by the light effect is displayed as the pre-stage effect before the character appears. By displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image by the effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning with a certain size (the size shown in FIG. 153 (d3) and FIG. 161 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Modified example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 162 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 158. For example, as shown in FIGS. 162 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 153 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 162 (d103). As such, the normal background image may be switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. In this way, the group notice effect may be executed during the execution of the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the Boingo group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 152. Further, instead of covering the entire screen by enlarging the last character, the background image used for the group notice effect may be switched to the next effect by an animation wound like a scroll.

(Dog herd notice)
A mode of producing the dog herd notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165.

In the present embodiment, the 6-person group notice, the bomb chew notice, and the boingo group notice are exemplified as the group notice effect, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is referred to as a dog group notice as shown in FIGS. 163 to 165. It may be the one that executes the group notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (e1), the first character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 163 (e2), a plurality of dog characters appear one after another, and FIG. 163 (e3). The screen area may be covered with a group of characters as shown in.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 164 (e4) to 164 (e6), the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 163 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice effect in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 164 (e6). As such, the normal background image is switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the subsequent production of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the dog group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 152.

As shown in FIG. 165, when the 6-person notice and the dog group notice are compared, the distance between the first displayed character and the last displayed character in the dog group notice (the length between them on the X-axis). S) X2 is shorter than the distance (length between the two on the X-axis) X1 between the character displayed first and the character displayed last in the 6-person group notice. Further, since the execution time is the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group notice is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six-person group notice. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group notice is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six-person group notice. In addition, the dog group notice production has a higher expectation (reliability) of a big hit than the 6-person group notice production, and the dog group notice production has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the 6-person group notice production.

(Execution of group notice production during reach line production)
With reference to FIGS. 166 and 167, an effect mode when the group notice effect is executed during the reach line will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 166 (f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 166 (f2) to (f4), and then FIGS. 167 (f5) and (f6). ) May be executed.

[Character movement in group notice production]
Next, the operation of the character in the group notice effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 168 to 175.

FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the movement of the character (stepping ver.) In the normal time. 169 and 170 are diagrams for explaining the movement (scroll ver.) Of the character in the normal time. The normal time is, for example, a state before the reach effect as shown in FIGS. 82 and 132 is performed. Further, in the normal time, it may include a state in which the group notice effect is not performed during the reach effect. The normal effect screen (background, etc.) shown in FIGS. 168 to 170 is different from the normal effect screen in stage A shown in FIG. 82 and the normal effect screen in stage B shown in FIG. 132. However, the normal effect screen shown in FIG. 82 and the normal effect screen shown in FIG. 132 may be replaced with the normal effect screens shown in FIGS. 168 to 170.

As shown in FIG. 168, as shown in FIG. 168, the character is always displayed and stepped on, while the background displayed on the back side of the character moves (scrolls) on the screen. So, there is a method to make the player look as if the character is moving.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 168 (A1) to (A3), a character (Yumemu-chan) is stepping in the center of the screen, and on the back side of the character, the background image of the city is displayed from one side (right side) of the screen to the other. It is moving toward the side (left side). This makes it possible for the player to see the character in the center of the screen as if he / she is moving in the city.

As another way of showing the movement of the character in normal times, as shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the character moves (scrolls) on the screen while the background displayed on the back side of the character does not move. There is a method to make the player look as if the character is moving.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B3), the character (Yumemu-chan) is moving from one side (right side) to the other side (left side) of the screen, but the back side is the city. The background image of is stuck. This makes it possible for the player to see the character appearing on the screen as if it were moving around the city. Further, in such a movement of the character, as shown in FIG. 169 (B3), the character hides the hold display (for example, the active display in the active display area 5A). Then, when the character moves further and the hold display appears, the hold display does not change as shown in FIG. 170 (B4-1), or as shown in FIG. 170 (B4-2). , The pending display may change (for example, the color or shape of the active display may change), suggesting that the changing symbol becomes a jackpot symbol. Specifically, if the probability that the changing symbol becomes a jackpot symbol is higher when the hold display does not change than when the hold display does not change, the hold that appears due to the movement of the character When the display changes, the player can expect a big hit to occur.

FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the character during the group notice effect and the normal time. In the present embodiment, the image of the character A (Yumemu-chan) is used as the group notice effect and the explanation of the character's operation in the normal time, but it may be applied to other characters B to F.

In FIG. 171 (a), an image of a character used in the group notice effect is shown. As shown in FIG. 171 (a), six types of images such as images A to F are used as the images of the characters in the group notice effect. The "first image" is exemplified as image A, the "second image" is represented by images B and C, the "third image" is represented by images D and E, and the "fourth image" is represented by image F. Further, in the group notice effect, each image of the image A to the image F is displayed in order, but in that case, the image A and the image F are for 5 frames, the image B and the image E are for 2 frames, and the image. C and image D are displayed for one frame, respectively. As described above, one frame corresponds to a time of about 33.3 msec. The image of the character in the group notice effect is not limited to 6 images (6 types), and may be composed of other even-numbered images such as 4 images (4 types) and 8 images (8 types).

In FIG. 171 (b), an image of a character used in a normal time is shown. As shown in FIG. 171 (b), 10 types of images such as images H to Q are used as images of characters in a normal time. All of images H to Q are used for 30 frames.

FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the character in a normal time. As shown in FIG. 172, in a normal state, images H to Q are used in order to orbit each of the images H to Q and displayed on the screen to express the movement of a character walking on the screen.

FIGS. 173 to 175 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the character at the time of the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 173, at the time of the group notice effect, the motion of the character running away is expressed on the screen by sequentially using the images A to F in order to display them on the screen. For example, in the image display for one cycle, the image A is displayed for 5 frames (about 165 msec), then the image B is displayed for 2 frames (about 66 msec), and then the image C is displayed for 1 frame (about 66 msec). Image D is displayed for 1 frame (about 33 msec), then image E is displayed for 2 frames (about 66 msec), and then image F is displayed for 5 frames (about 165 msec). ) Is displayed, then image E is displayed for 2 frames (about 66 msec), then image D is displayed for 1 frame (about 33 msec), and then image C is displayed for 1 frame (about 33 msec). Then, the image B is displayed for two frames (about 66 msec).

As described above, in one cycle of the animation in the group notice effect, the image A and the image F have a longer display time than the other images B to E. By switching and displaying each image in order so as to go around in this way, in the group notice effect, an animation is displayed in which the character frames in the screen, frames out from the screen, and runs away.

Each image of the character used for the group notice effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 174. In FIGS. 174 and 175, the vertical direction with respect to the character is defined as 0 degree. Further, in FIGS. 174 and 175, the positions of the hands of the characters will be described, and the positions of the feet will be omitted. In this embodiment, the "hand" and "arm" of the character are defined as the same. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the character's hand can be said to be the position of the character's arm.

As shown in FIG. 174 (a), in the image A, the position of the character's hand (arm) is located at the highest point on the traveling direction side of the hand swing width in the animation of the group notice effect. It is an image that becomes a position. For example, in image A, the position of the character's right hand (right arm) is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side, and the position of the character's left hand (left arm) is on the opposite direction side (direction opposite to the traveling direction). The position is tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction. In this case, the "first position" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side. Further, the "highest point on the traveling direction side" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side. The "highest point on the traveling direction side" is not limited to the position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side, but is the highest point on the traveling direction side of the hand swing width in the predetermined animation. Any position may be used as long as it is a position.

As shown in FIG. 174 (b), the image B is an image in which the position of the character's hand is the second position close to the first position on the traveling direction side. For example, in the image B, the position of the character's right hand is tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side. When the image B is taken as an example of the second image, the "second position" is exemplified as a position tilted by 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side.

As shown in FIG. 174 (c), the image C is an image in which the position of the character's hand is the second position close to the first position on the traveling direction side. For example, in the image C, the position of the character's right hand is tilted by 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted by 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side. When the image C is taken as an example of the second image, the "second position" is exemplified as a position tilted by 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side.

As shown in FIG. 174 (f), in the image F, the position of the character's hand is located at the highest point on the opposite side of the hand swing width of the hand in the animation of the group notice effect, and is the first position. It is an image that becomes a paired fourth position. For example, in the image F, the position of the character's right hand is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side. In this case, the "fourth position" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite side. Further, the "highest point on the reverse direction side" is exemplified as a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the reverse direction side. The "highest point on the reverse direction side" is not limited to the position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the reverse direction side, but is the highest point on the reverse direction side of the hand swing width in the predetermined animation. Any position may be used as long as it is a position.

As shown in FIG. 174 (e), the image E is an image in which the position of the character's hand is the third position close to the fourth position in the opposite direction. For example, in the image E, the position of the character's right hand is tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side. When the image E is taken as an example of the third image, the "third position" is exemplified as a position inclined by 90 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side.

As shown in FIG. 174 (d), the image D is an image in which the position of the character's hand is the third position close to the fourth position on the opposite side. For example, in the image F, the position of the character's right hand is tilted by 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side, and the position of the character's left hand is tilted by 100 degrees from the vertical direction on the traveling direction side. When the image D is taken as an example of the third image, the "third position" is exemplified as a position tilted by 80 degrees from the vertical direction on the opposite direction side.

Since the first position is a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction and the fourth position is a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the opposite direction, the image A (first image) and the image F ( The fourth image) is paired with the same absolute value angle (100 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character.

Further, the second position in the case of image B (second image) is a position tilted 90 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction, and the third position in the case of image E (third image) is vertical in the opposite direction. Since the position is tilted 90 degrees from the direction, the image B and the image E are paired with the same absolute value angle (90 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character. Alternatively, the second position in the case of image C (second image) is a position tilted 80 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction, and the third position in the case of image D (third image) is vertical in the opposite direction. Since the position is tilted by 80 degrees from the direction, the image C and the image D are paired with the same absolute value angle (80 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character.

Further, the image A (first image) is an image in which the position of the character's hand is tilted from the vertical direction as compared with the image B and the image C (second image), and the character's hand is most swung up. Therefore, the image A is an animation image that is more characteristic than the image B and the image C. The image F (fourth image) is an image in which the position of the character's hand is tilted from the vertical direction as compared with the image D and the image E (third image), and the character's hand is paired with the first image and swings up most. Is. Therefore, the image F is an animation image that is more characteristic than the image D and the image E. Such characteristic images A and F are not used in normal times when an animation of walking a character is displayed.

By switching and displaying such a plurality of images, in the group notice effect, the images are displayed so that the running character moves faster than the walking character in the normal time. Here, in the group notice effect, a plurality of types of images in which the position of the character's hand is a predetermined position are used, but as shown in FIGS. 173 and 175, the group notice depends on the position of the character's hand. Some images are not used in the production.

For example, the position of the character's hand is the first position (the position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction as shown in FIG. 174 (a)) and the fourth position (the opposite direction as shown in FIG. 174 (f)). The position intermediate with the position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction is defined as the intermediate position (that is, the vertical direction at 0 degrees). In the group notice effect, an image in which the character's hand is positioned between the intermediate position (vertical direction) and the second position (position tilted 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction in the traveling direction) is not used. Furthermore, images in which the character's hand is located between the intermediate position (vertical direction) and the third position (position tilted 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction in the opposite direction) are not used. ..

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175 (g), in the group notice effect, the character's right hand is positioned at a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position (vertical direction) in the traveling direction. No images are used. Further, as shown in FIG. 175 (h), in the group notice effect, an image in which the character's right hand is positioned at a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position (vertical direction) in the opposite direction is used. I can't. Further, although not shown, in the group notice effect, an image in which the position of the character's hand is in the intermediate position (vertical direction) is not used. An image in which the position of the character's hand is in the intermediate position (vertical direction) is not used even in the normal state.

The group notice effect is such that multiple characters run through the screen, so there is a sense of speed and presence. In order to make the animation in the group notice effect smooth, it is preferable to use more images, but the group notice effect is an effect in which a plurality of characters run through the screen, and the image A Since characteristic images such as (first image) and image F (fourth image) are used, even if the images between them are omitted to some extent and the images are thinned out, they are shown to the player as a smooth animation. be able to. As described above, while using the characteristic image, even if a part of the image in between is omitted, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

On the other hand, in the character walking in a normal time as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, the movement of the character is slow, so that the roughness of the animation becomes conspicuous unless more images are used than the images in the group notice effect. .. In the present embodiment, images for 30 frames are normally used. However, as described above, in the group notice effect, even if a part of the image is omitted, it can be shown to the player as a smooth animation, so that the designer does not need to prepare many images.

Further, characteristic images such as image A (first image) and image F (fourth image) have a longer display time (larger number of frames) than other images B to E. Therefore, it is possible to make the animation in the group notice effect shine, and it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Main configurations and effects]
The technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95. People group notice production) and
A process of executing a blessing effect executing means (for example, a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a blessing effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that displays an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. ) And, with
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect (for example, the fanfare effect shown in FIGS. 110 to 112 is executed after the 6-person group notice effect shown in FIGS. 89 to 95 is executed).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9), the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the first predetermined period (for example, the period of T1 + T2 shown in FIG. 52) until it is suggested that the display is the result of the loss display, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 52 and 53).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable pattern of the variable numbers 20, 23, 26), the variable display is displayed after the variable display is started. In the second predetermined period (for example, T3 + T4 period, T5 + T6 period, T7 + T8 period) until it is suggested that the specific display result is the first half of the second predetermined period, the first display period. Starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 52 and 53).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, the feeling of exhilaration may diminish with the passage of time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, it is in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group notice effect, it is possible to maintain the feeling of exhilaration and evoke it again. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the fanfare effect, which is a blessing effect, is executed. After that, even if the feeling of exhilaration diminishes with the passage of time, the feeling of exhilaration can be maintained or evoked again by the blessing effect.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. That is, the specific display result is a display result for controlling the gaming state to an advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the light emitting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED substrate 20 becomes the combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the light emitting corresponding to the big hit. The combination of embodiments is the specific display result. Further, when the combination of the light emitting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED substrate 20 becomes the combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the big hit is specified. It will be the display result. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol (for example, a big hit such as "3,3,3" or "7,7,7". A big hit occurs when the game is stopped as a combination of symbols), and the display of the specific special symbol is the specific display result.

The "loss display result" is a display result different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the loss display result. That is, the loss display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to the advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the light emitting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the loss occurs. The combination of the corresponding light emission modes results in the loss display result. Further, when the combination of the light emitting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the light emitting mode corresponding to the loss is obtained. The combination will be the result of the loss display. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific predetermined symbol (for example, a combination of lost symbols such as "3, 2, 3") and stops. Occasionally, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the value-adding rate for games (for example, the payout rate of a game ball) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In the present embodiment, as an advantageous state, a big hit gaming state controlled when each of the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probabilistic big hits 1 to 9 occurs is exemplified. The advantageous state may be a small hit gaming state controlled when a small hit occurs, or may be a probabilistic change state or a time saving state.

The "new display of the character" may be a character of the same type as the character initially displayed in the group notice effect, or may be a character of a different type from the character initially displayed in the group notice effect. good.

The "blessing effect" is an effect of displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display having become a specific display result. It is also a production that displays an image that congratulates you. "Blessing" includes suggesting or notifying the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, "blessing" improves the player's expectation for the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to the advantageous state. Including letting you do it. For example, in the blessing effect, the combination of the light emitting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the big hit, and the special figure 2 variable display unit of the special figure LED board 20. The combination of the light emitting modes in 22 is a combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the big hit, or the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol ( It includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that the game has become a big hit symbol) or that the player is controlled to the big hit game state.

"The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" means that the group notice effect is executed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1, and then the blessing is performed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. Including that the production is performed. In addition, "the blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" indicates that the display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is the specific display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. When the group notice effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or gives a notice before the display result is started, the group notice effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the hold memory of the 1 is started and the 1 Includes the execution of a blessing effect within a variable display based on the hold memory of.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 52 and 53. It is exemplified by the period of T1 + T2 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of the light emission modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED substrate 20 is the combination of the light emission modes corresponding to the loss. , The combination of the light emitting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED substrate 20 corresponds to the big hit, and the combination of the light emitting modes corresponds to the loss. This includes stopping the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R as a specific predetermined symbol (missing symbol combination). Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the loss display result because the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 52 and 53. It is exemplified by the period of T3 + T4, the period of T5 + T6, and the period of T7 + T8 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of the light emitting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is the combination of the light emitting modes corresponding to the big hit. , The combination of light emitting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of light emitting modes corresponding to a big hit, and variable display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. Includes that the decorative symbol that is being displayed becomes a specific special symbol (big hit symbol combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result by the operation of the movable body 32 at the specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

(1-2) The second display period is a period longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is a longer period than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 51).

From this, the group notice effect can be made powerful by setting the second display period in which the characters appear one after another in the group notice effect to be the longest period. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from the first appearance of the character to the first departure of the character as the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the suddenly executed group notice effect from becoming full. Can be done.

(1-3) The character displayed first in the first display period is a character having a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume-chan, who is the main character).

As a result, the character that first appears in the group notice production is a character with a high priority like the main character, which is familiar to the player, but after that, a character that appears less frequently than the main character in other productions. By appearing in the group notice production, it is possible to surprise the player about the group notice production and make the player feel that it is a rare production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "high-priority character" includes the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character having the highest priority among the characters other than the main character, and is executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the production to be performed.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the character is displayed in the group effect. Is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 52 and 53).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group notice effect is executed in the vicinity of the latter half of the first half. So, the afterglow of the group notice production can be extended to the later side as much as possible.

(1-5) As for the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After pretending to be, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 23 and 26) that becomes the specific display result.
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first. 1 The display period begins (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 52 and 53).

As a result, even in the case of a relief pattern in which the display result of the variable display is a hit display result after the display result of the variable display is pretended to be a lost display result, the fanfare effect which is a blessing effect is executed. , The group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time to give an uplifting feeling, and even if the uplifting feeling diminishes with the passage of time, the blessing effect keeps the uplifting feeling or evokes it again. Can be done.

(1-6) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. With the pattern suggested to be (for example, the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 20, 23, 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. Common indications are made (eg, examples shown in FIGS. 82-131).

As a result, for example, a common effect is executed for the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 and the variation pattern of the variation number 20 until the display result is finalized, and the display result of the variation pattern of the variation number 12 and the variation pattern of the variation number 23. The common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and the common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed between the variation pattern of the variation number 15 and the variation pattern of the variation number 26. Therefore, the common effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

It should be noted that the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. (For example, the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are different from each other until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. May be done.

As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the effects different from each other are being executed.

(1-7) A notice effect for notifying that the execution period of the group effect and the display result of the variable display, which is different from the group notice, will be the specific display result (for example, the SP first half title notice effect). May overlap with the execution period of
The notice effect ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 146 to 152).

As a result, even if the group notice effect is executed while the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the SP first half title advance notice effect can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the advance notice effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 146 to 152).

As a result, when the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the player can pay attention to the execution of the group advance notice effect. It should be noted that the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect do not start at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the notice effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20). , The group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice).

As a result, other notice effects with a lower expectation of a big hit than the group notice effect are not displayed on the front layer having a higher priority than the group notice effect, so that the big hit is suitable for the player. Can be suggested. As described above, in the present embodiment, the production having a high expectation of a big hit is not covered with the production having a low expectation on the front side.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness is reduced in both the background display and the display in the advance notice effect, while the display of information related to the game (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory). The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when the group notice effect is executed, the brightness of the image related to the background display and other notice effects (for example, the image related to the SP first half title notice effect having a lower expectation than the group notice effect) is lowered, while the game is played. It is important for the player as much as possible because the display of information about the game, which is highly important for the player regarding the victory or defeat of the game and the advantage, is given a high priority, and the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed. Information can be shown.

(2-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 48 and 89).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

In the "first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed", as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the entire character initially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is still present. While it is not displayed, a situation in which a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 89A, the game machine frame 3 displays an image. In the display area visible to the player in the state of covering the screen of the device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while the character is at the edge of the display area visible to the player. Includes situations where part of is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first appearing character is completely invisible, but a part of the first appearing character is visible.

"The second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed" is shown in FIG. 48 (b). As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 as compared with the first situation. And while the entire second displayed character has not yet been displayed, a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or FIG. 89 (b). As shown in the above, in the display area visible to the player when the game machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the edge of the display area visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the entire character displayed second is not yet displayed, while the character is visible to the player. Includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears after the first appearing character before the first appearing character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group effect, the first displayed character and the second displayed character have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, since the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 46).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be a plurality of characters, so that it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character will appear.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output during the display of the character displayed first in the group effect, but by the time the display of the character displayed second is started. Exit (for example, the example shown in FIG. 89).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output and the first character appears, so that the player can be notified that the group notice effect has been executed, while the second character By the end of the start sound by the time it appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group notice effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but it ends by the time the second character appears. ..

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and a character in which a part of the whole body does not fit in the display area of the screen. Part includes a character that fits and is displayed in the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 44).

As a result, more characters can appear in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from that of the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character displayed in which the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and a part of the whole body are displayed in the display area of the screen. The other part of the whole body is displayed in a mixed manner with the first character that is displayed in the display area of the screen without being fitted (for example, the example shown in FIG. 44).

This makes it possible to give the illusion that more types of characters are appearing in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-7) A shield (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) covers a part of the screen, and the character displayed first in the group effect is displayed at the position where the shield covers. Is started, and then the display of the second displayed character is started.
Even when the screen is visually recognized with the shield covered, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 48).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen actually viewed by the player, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, so there is a question as to whether or not it is a group notice production, and only one person appears. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that it may be.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is visually recognized from the side toward the screen and the shield, it is possible to visually recognize the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 48).

As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and visually recognizes the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice effect, so that the group notice effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is the case and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display relating to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shield on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, the predetermined size of the screen (for example, for example). A display relating to the group effect is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that it can be applied to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches).

As a result, even when the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed so as to use a size larger than a predetermined size, the created group notice effect data can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect are a low importance character (for example, maids C to F) having a low importance in the content of the gaming machine, and the low importance character. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the contents of the gaming machine.
The high-severity character has a lower proportion than the low-severity character in that the face does not fit in the display area of the screen and the part other than the face of the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and is displayed (for example, the figure). Example shown in 44).

As a result, a character with high importance such as the main character can easily recognize the face in the group notice production as compared with a character with low importance such as a supporting character, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the group notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing the effect is provided.
The effect executed by the effect executing means includes a group effect (for example, a group notice effect shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, in the group notice production, since the largest number of characters appear in all the productions, it is possible to make the player aware that the variable display that can be expected to be a big hit is performed.

"The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is 1 among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects executed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, 1 The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect having the largest number of characters displayed on one screen includes the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is described in all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects performed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect at the time of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, the effect is concerned. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

(3-2) An effect in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group effect, and a specific effect in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, an effect of the latter half of the SP reach or an effect of the final reach) is executed.

As a result, various effects can be executed, and among them, the largest number of characters can appear in the group notice effect.

It should be noted that the specific effect may be an effect in which the number of displayed character types is larger than that of the group notice effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible to show the player a powerful effect in the second display period, which is the longest period among the group notice effects.

The number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group notice effect may be larger than the number of character types displayed in the specific effect.

(4-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
In the group production,
An auxiliary display is made to show that the character is in progress,
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character has priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character is used. When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 45).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, while it is possible to show the player a more dynamic group notice effect by displaying the auxiliary display on the character, the auxiliary display does not hinder the visibility of other characters, so that more characters can be displayed. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display indicating that the character is progressing, and for example, an image display emphasizing that the character is progressing as shown in FIG. 45 (as shown in FIG. 45). For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke (an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of passage of a character (for example, an image display of a character's footprint), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example). , An image display representing the aura of the character). The "auxiliary display" may be an image display performed in the vicinity of the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The layer displayed on the screen is different between the display of the character in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 43, the image of sand smoke is layer 1 and the character. The image of is placed in the layers after layer 2).

As a result, the character image and the auxiliary display can be preferably shown to the player in the group notice effect.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10).
The moving image data corresponding to the group effect includes the first character data (for example, the moving image data of the character C of the layer 9) and the second character data (for example, the character C of the layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. Video data) including
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values relating to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values relating to the movement of the character are the same.

As a result, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character.

(4-4) In the group effect, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 43).

As a result, since a plurality of characters do not operate in the same position at the same position, the group notice effect can be preferably shown to the player.

(5-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, the display of the newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, FIG. 90, FIG. Example shown in 91).

The "newly displayed character" may be the character that appeared second in the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, or the character that appeared third or later in the group notice effect. You may. Considering that the group notice effect is an effect in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, the character that appears second in the group notice effect is displayed first as the "newly displayed character". It is preferable that the character that appears immediately after the second appearance overtakes the character that is displayed first because of a sense of dynamism and presence.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the character that appears second is overtaken by the character that appears first and disappears at the top as it is, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character that overtakes another character.
The number of overtaken characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaken character.

As a result, the group notice effect can be prevented from becoming too complicated, and the group notice effect with a lively feeling can be shown to the player. Can be shown to.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is more than the outline of the other character. Is also displayed thick (for example, the example shown in FIG. 47).

As a result, it is possible to show the player how the character overtakes another character in an easy-to-understand manner.

(6-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
Execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the push effect) for displaying the suggestion image (for example, the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the character image of "PUSH !!") suggesting the execution of the group effect. Means (for example, a process of executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) are provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
The display of the suggestion image ends by the start of the first display period in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 88).

The "suggestion image" may be any image as long as it suggests the execution of the group notice effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means as shown in FIG. 88. , It may be an effect image such as a light or a pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of the group notice effect, or it may be a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group notice effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image (for example, a character image of "group") suggesting the execution of the group notice effect. In the timer effect, the time until the group notice effect is executed by the clock image is timed, and when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, a character image suggesting the execution of the group notice effect (character of "group"). The image) may be displayed.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) is finished, the display of the character is first started in the first display period (for example,). Example shown in FIG. 88).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image prompting the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a character image of "PUSH !!").
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operating means is operated during the display of the suggested image ends by the time when the display of the character first starts in the first display period (for example, FIG. 88). Example shown in).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of effects including the group effect (for example, 6-person group notice, background notice, lamp notice) is executed. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 88, 97, 98).

As a result, a plurality of effects are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(7-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95. It is equipped with a crowd notice production and a dog group notice production shown in FIGS. 163 to 165).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
The group production includes a first group production (for example, a 6-person group notice production) and a second group production (for example, a dog group notice production).
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect proceed at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1), respectively.
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each proceed at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2).
The first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured so that the linear distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than that of the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 165). ..

As shown in FIG. 165, the "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in the group notice effect such as the 6-person group notice effect and the dog group notice effect. It is a linear distance (X-axis distance) from the end of the character to the end of the character displayed last. This linear distance is set to time T, where T is the time from the display of the first character to the display of the last character from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and V is the speed of each character. It can be calculated by multiplying the velocity V (T × V).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to preferably show the player two types of group notice effects.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1 / V1) is the same as or substantially the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2 / V2) (for example, in FIG. 165). Example shown).

This makes it possible to execute two types of group notice effects using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the first group effect is executed.
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for the dog group notice effect, which has a lower execution probability than the 6-person group notice and has a high expectation, the speed of the character is made slower than the 6-person group notice, so that, for example, the player shoots the character of the dog group notice effect. You can increase the chances of doing it.

(7-4) The degree to which a plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect are dense (for example, the degree of density D2) is the degree to which the plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect are dense (for example, dense). Greater than degree D1).

As a result, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and the moving distance of the characters in the group notice effect, so that it is possible to provide a group notice effect suitable for the player.

(7-5) In the second group effect, a plurality of characters located at the rearmost position are arranged from the lower part to the upper part of the screen.
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the display corresponding to the subsequent effect is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 164).

As a result, it is possible to switch to an image for the next production and show it to the player at the opportunity of the group notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, Boingo shown in FIGS. 153 to 162) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With group notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen.
At the timing related to the first start of the display of the character at the specific position, the front-stage display (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see is performed (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect). , Example shown in FIG. 153).

The "previous stage display" may be any display as long as it makes the display of the character difficult to see, and is a display that hides a specific position where the character appears (for example, display of an effect image such as light or a pattern). Etc.). "Difficult to see" means that the player cannot completely see the specific position, the player can see the specific position but the specific position is difficult to see, and the player can see the specific position but the character can see the character from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize the specific position and the appearance of the character from the specific position can be visually recognized, but the visual recognition is difficult.

The "timing related to the first start of the character display at a specific position" is the same timing as the first start of the character display at the specific position, or the timing when the character display first starts at the specific position. A timing within a predetermined period before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player thinks that the display of the character first starts at a specific position) is included.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning with a certain size, and suddenly a large character is displayed. Does not cause the player.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to proceed from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen.
The enlarged display makes it difficult to visually recognize the character at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 159).

This makes it possible to give a visual effect as if a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position with a certain depth.

(8-3) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end (example shown in FIG. 157). ..

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) The background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent effect in conjunction with the movement of the character displayed last in the group effect (for example, FIG. 157). , Example shown in FIG. 158).

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end.
On the back side of the character displayed last, other characters in the group effect are not displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 159).

As a result, even if the succeeding character image is placed in the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is not necessary to place the succeeding character image, and a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position having a depth. It is possible to give a visual effect as if it appeared.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. A specific volume higher than the predetermined volume is set, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. The production sound is output.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It can improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled so that the sound output means raises or lowers the volume, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but raising or lowering the volume is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. It may be something that raises or lowers the volume.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the effect sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the effect sound rises to a specific volume starts to decrease in the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 51).

As a result, the sound output in the group notice effect is performed in a shorter time for the fade-in, and the fade-out is performed in a longer time than the fade-in, so that the sound of the group notice effect can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
It is equipped with a plurality of light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 such as a frame lamp).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
The luminance data table composed of the plurality of luminance data for causing each of the plurality of light emitting means to emit light is the first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, the frame lamp shown in FIG. 57 (a)). The grandchild table W1), the second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 57B), and the third brightness corresponding to the third display period. A data table (for example, a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 57 (c)) is included.
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is a first luminance data in which the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with low luminance and the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with high luminance are combined. The combination of the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with low luminance and the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data (for example, FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 57),
The second luminance data table is set so that more of the light emitting means emits light with higher luminance than the first luminance data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is a frame lamp grandchild table W1). High brightness (“0” to “F”) data is stored in more lamps).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, a luminance data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and since the second luminance data table is designed to emit light with higher luminance than the first luminance data table, the first display period In, it is possible to express a weak footstep when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, it is possible to express a strong footstep when multiple characters appear one after another, and a more suitable group notice effect is given to the player. Can be provided.

"Data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with low brightness" and "data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with high brightness" are a plurality of light emitting units included in each light emitting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1). It is the light emission data (light emitting element) for each time in WWW in the upper lamp 9C. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57 (a), the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) in T1-1. be. As the RGB data, the data corresponding to the extinguishing is "000", the data corresponding to the low-luminance light emission is "100", and the data corresponding to the high-luminance light emission is "F00".

The "luminance data" is light emission data for each time in each light emitting means (for example, frame lamp, on-board lamp 9C), and is "data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with low brightness" or "high brightness of the light emitting means". It is a collection of "data for causing light emission in" for each time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57 (a), it is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in T1-1.

The luminance data table is a collection of "luminance data" in a predetermined period (for example, the light emission time specified by the parent table or the child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57 (a), T1-1 to T1- It is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in 11.

(10-2) The first luminance data table has a longer luminance data switching interval than the second luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals. , The grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that the character is running faster than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are evenly spaced, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are not evenly spaced (for example, shown in FIG. 56). As described above, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at 50-80 msec intervals).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that a plurality of characters are running out of step with each other as compared with the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-1) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for moving a light emitting point in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is a group. Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of travel of the notice),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that does not move the light emitting part in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is high over a plurality of places. It emits light with brightness).

As a result, it is possible to express how characters appear in the first display period and a plurality of characters appear one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-2) In the first luminance data table, the light emitting means located in the vicinity of the character emits light with high brightness according to the progress position of the character first displayed in the group effect, and the character emits light. It includes luminance data that causes the light emitting means located in the vicinity of a non-reachable portion to be turned off or emit light at low brightness (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 57 (a)).

As a result, the lamp emits light with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or emits light with low brightness at the place where it has not reached yet, so that the lamp emits light. It can be used to express how the leading character progresses. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-3) The first luminance data table causes the light emitting means to emit light with high brightness, and then, as the character first displayed in the group effect progresses, the light emitting means is turned off or emitted with low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 57A).

As a result, the lamp emits light with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or emits light with low brightness at places that have not yet reached or have already passed. , It is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the light emission of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-4) The first luminance data table includes luminance data that causes the light emitting means to emit light with high brightness, and then causes the light emitting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect to emit light with high brightness. (For example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 57A),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that causes the light emitting means to emit light with high brightness and then does not cause the light emitting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect to emit light with high brightness (for example, FIG. 57). Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp emits light with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at a place that has not yet reached or has already passed. Alternatively, since the light is emitted at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the light emitted from the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-5) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with high brightness and extinguishing the light emitting means adjacent to the light emitting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 57 (a)). Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that causes the light emitting means to emit light with high brightness and causes the light emitting means adjacent to the light emitting means to emit light (for example, the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 57B). Example).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp emits light with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at a place that has not yet reached or has already passed. Alternatively, since the light is emitted at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the light emitted from the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-1) The third luminance data table includes luminance data for increasing the number of the light emitting means to be turned off according to the progress of the character in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, a grandchild for a frame lamp). The table W3 is turned off or emits light at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice).

As a result, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or emits light with low brightness as the character progresses, so that it is possible to express how the character progresses by using the lamp turning off or emitting light. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-3) In the third luminance data table, the switching interval of the luminance data in the light emitting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is the character in the group effect. It is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the light emitting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction opposite to the traveling direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec. The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappears. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, the control of the light emitting means starts at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the control of the light emitting means ends during the first display period.
In the second luminance data table, the control of the light emitting means is started during the first display period, the control of the light emitting means is continued even during the second display period, and the light emission is continued during the third display period. The control of the means is finished,
In the third luminance data table, control of the light emitting means starts during the third display period (for example, an example of the group notice luminance data table shown in FIG. 80).

As a result, the lamp emits light with high brightness from the middle of the first display period as in the second display period. Therefore, the state in which the character progresses before the second display period is expressed by the light emission of the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-2) In the second luminance data table, the control period of the light emitting means is set longer than that of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table.
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period of the light emitting means than the third luminance data table (for example, an example of the group advance luminance data table shown in FIG. 80).

As a result, it is possible to express the appearance of a plurality of characters one after another in the first display period with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-1) The luminance data first defined in the first luminance data table is the luminance data that causes the plurality of light emitting means used in the group effect to be turned off or emit light at low luminance (for example, FIG. 56). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the first luminance data is turned off or emits light at low luminance for all the lamps).

This is more preferable because the lamp emits light when the group notice effect is executed after a break is once made without mixing with the light emission of the lamp that was performed before the group notice effect was executed. A group notice production can be provided.

(14-2) The luminance data initially defined in each of the second luminance data table and the third luminance data table is the luminance that does not turn off or emit light at low luminance from the plurality of luminous means used in the group effect. It is data (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamp emits light with high luminance for the first luminance data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group notice effect is executed, the player emphasizes the flow of the effect and performs the group notice effect without separating by turning off all the lamps or emitting low brightness. Can be shown to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-3) The luminance data finally defined in the third luminance data table is the luminance data that causes the plurality of light emitting means used in the group effect to be turned off or emit light at low luminance (for example, FIG. 56). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data is turned off or emits light at low luminance for all the lamps).

As a result, when the group notice effect ends, all the lamps are turned off or the lamps are made to emit light at low brightness, so that the player can recognize that the group notice effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 56, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified as such).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed so as not to repeat the luminance data having the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, the same luminance data is used in the frame lamp grandchild table W3). Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, for the luminance data in the third display period, which is set for a longer period than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the luminance data as it is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 56, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is specified last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is not specified last (for example,). As shown in FIG. 56, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 defines the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 does not specify the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. On the other hand, for the luminance data in the first display period, the luminance data is specified as it is, but instead, the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified, so that the defect countermeasures are taken during the 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-2) The luminance data for troubleshooting is the luminance data in which the longest time is defined among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is from the beginning of the first luminance data table. It is luminance data for preventing the light emitting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 56, 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lamp emission control from being performed from the beginning of the first luminance data table by the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, so that a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(16-3) The luminance data for defect countermeasures is luminance data for causing the adjacent light emitting means to emit light in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), for 10 minutes for defect countermeasures. The luminance data of is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps emit light in order so that the light emitting part deviates from the previous state).

As a result, even if a problem occurs, the adjacent frame lamps are made to emit light regularly in order so that the light emitting part deviates from the previous state, so that it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated, which is preferable. A group notice production can be provided.

(17-1) The light emitting means includes a single color light emitting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a multi-color light emitting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9) that emit light in a plurality of colors. Including ~ 9C13)
The luminance data that causes the monochromatic light emitting means to emit light at a specific high luminance includes a specific value (for example, “6”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance emission.
The luminance data for causing the plurality of color light emitting means to emit light at the specific high luminance includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, “8” to “F”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance emission.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light between the lamps that emit light with high brightness by making the value corresponding to the light emission of high brightness appropriate according to the type of light emitting means, and it is possible to produce a suitable group notice. Can be provided.

(17-2) The monochromatic light emitting means includes a first color light emitting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that emits light in the first color and a second color light emitting means (for example, the left side of the board) that emits light in the second color. Including lamps 9B1 to 9B5)
Regardless of the luminance data that causes either the first color light emitting means or the second color light emitting means to emit light at the specific high brightness, the specific value (for example, “for example,” is used as a value corresponding to the specific high brightness light emission. 6 ”) is included.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light even among the lamps that emit light in the same single color, and it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(18-1) Both the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data different from each other for each of the light emitting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 57). Grandchild table for frame lamp shown in),
The luminance data table used in the advance notice effect, which is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, is the light emitting means provided on the left and right sides of the game machine. It contains common luminance data for each (eg, grandchild table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 64).

As a result, in the group notice effect, by individually controlling the light emission of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, a more detailed light emission mode can be realized, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. can.

(19-1) The group effect interrupts during the execution of a notice effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result. May be executed in
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the light emitting means continues to emit light according to the luminance data table corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 166 and 167).
The light emitting means used in the group effect is the same as the light emitting means used in the notice effect, or includes the light emitting means used in the notice effect and the light emitting means not used in the notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the reach line effect, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and the attacker lamp, which are always used in the group notice effect, are not used).

As a result, even when the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, the common lamp emits light, so that the effect by light emission can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice effect is provided. be able to. For example, if the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, the light emission of the lamp in the group notice effect and the light emission of the lamp in the other notice effect are mixed, but the lamp that emits light in both of them is assumed to be. If they are different from each other, many lamps emit light in a complicated manner, which makes the appearance unattractive and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this respect, if the light emission of the lamp in the group notice effect and the light emission of the lamp in other notice effects are made common, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from emitting light in a complicated manner.

(19-2) The advance notice effect ends during the execution of the group effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, a symbol feed effect) different from the advance notice effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 166 and 167). Example),
The light emitting means used in the group effect is the same as the light emitting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the light emitting means used in the predetermined effect and the light emitting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 166 and 167).

As a result, even if the group is switched to another effect during the group notice effect, the common lamp is emitting light, so that the effect of light emission can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(19-3) The group effect is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group notice lottery shown in FIG. 20).

As a result, it is determined whether or not the group notice effect is executed by lottery regardless of other effects, so that the processing burden related to the execution of the group notice effect can be reduced, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(20-1) The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific light emitting means can emit light when it is controlled to the advantageous state, and does not emit light when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is a round of a big hit gaming state in which a V prize can be generated. It emits light to notify that it is inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for causing the specific light emitting means to emit light (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 56).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect emits light during the group notice effect, which causes the player to misunderstand whether the lamp is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(20-2) The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific light emitting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is effective by light emission (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J emits light to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A and triggers it. The button lamp 9K emits light to prompt the operation of pressing the push button 31B),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for causing the specific light emitting means to emit light (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 56).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect emits light during the group notice effect, which makes the player misunderstand whether the operation of the operating means is being promoted. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(21-1) An advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a symbol) becomes a specific display result (for example, a combination of big hit symbols). ) Is a controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Group effect execution means (for example, group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, 6 shown in FIGS. 89 to 95) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. People group notice production) and
A variable display unit (for example, the variable display unit shown in FIG. 34) that executes a specific effect (for example, a conversation notice effect, a pseudo-ream) whose expectation that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is lower than that of the group effect. Displaying production processing), and equipped with
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 51).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 89 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 91 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 92 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 93 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 94 (a37) to 95 (a42). Period shown),
The variation of the identification information includes a first variation (eg, pre-variation) and a second variation (eg, post-variation) after the first variation.
The variation pattern of the second variation is determined according to whether or not the display result of the variation display is the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the post-variation pattern is lost and a big hit. It depends on which time it is),
The variation pattern of the first variation is determined according to the variation pattern of the second variation (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the pre-variation pattern is determined according to the posterior variation pattern).
The group effect is determined by a lottery using the information regarding the second variation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the group notice effect corresponds to the post-variation number corresponding to the post-variation pattern. Will be decided),
The specific effect is determined by a lottery using the information on the first variation without using the information on the second variation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (d), (e), (f). , The mode of the conversation notice effect and the pseudo-ream is determined according to the pre-variation number corresponding to the pre-variation pattern).

Specifically, the group notice effect is determined by a lottery using the post-variation number corresponding to the post-variation pattern, so that the normal reach, the first half of the SP reach, the second half of the SP reach, the final reach, and a big hit in those reach. It is possible to set the degree of expectation (reliability) of the big hit in the group notice production in detail according to the situation, such as the presence or absence of. On the other hand, the mode of the conversation notice effect and the pseudo-ream is determined by a lottery using the pre-variation number corresponding to the pre-variation pattern without using the post-variation number, regardless of the type of reach. The amount of data used for can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect by using a suitable lottery method according to the type of effect.

(21-2) The specific effect (for example, an effect by a pseudo-ream) is an effect of performing a re-variable display (for example, a pseudo-variation) in which the variation display of the identification information is temporarily stopped and then the variation display of the identification information is resumed. Is.

This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data used in the lottery that determines the mode of the pseudo-ream.

(21-3) The specific effect is an effect related to a conversation notice by a character (for example, a conversation notice effect).

As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for the lottery for determining whether or not the conversation notice effect is executed and its type and character color.

(21-4) In the group effect, in addition to the information regarding the second variation (for example, the posterior variation number corresponding to the posterior variation pattern), the information regarding the first variation (for example, the pre-variation number corresponding to the pre-variation pattern). ) Is determined by lottery.

As a result, whether or not the group notice effect is executed and its type are determined by lottery using the variation numbers corresponding to the total variation pattern in which the front variation number and the rear variation number are set. In detail, it is possible to set the degree of expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the group notice production.

(21-5) In the group effect, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 44, an animation in which the character runs is displayed in the group notice effect).
The plurality of images constituting the predetermined animation are
A first image (for example, in FIG. 174) in which the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is the first position located at the highest point on the traveling direction side of the hand swing width in the predetermined animation. Image A) shown and a second image (for example, image B and image C shown in FIG. 174) in which the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is the second position close to the first position on the traveling direction side. And, the position of the hand of the character (for example, the position of the right hand) is located at the highest point on the side opposite to the traveling direction of the character in the swing width of the hand in the predetermined animation, and is paired with the first position. The fourth image (for example, the image F shown in FIG. 174) and the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) are close to the fourth position on the side opposite to the traveling direction. A third image (for example, image D and image E shown in FIG. 174) as a position is included.
An image in which the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is between the intermediate position between the first position and the fourth position and the second position (for example, FIG. 175 (g)). The image shown in FIG. 175) and the image located between the intermediate position and the third position (for example, the image shown in FIG. 175 (h)) are not included.

As a result, the group notice effect is an effect in which a plurality of characters run through the screen, and characteristic images such as image A (first image) and image F (fourth image) are used. Even if the images between them are omitted to some extent and the images are thinned out, it can be shown to the player as a smooth animation. As described above, while using the characteristic image, even if a part of the image in between is omitted, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(21-6) The number of a plurality of images constituting the predetermined animation is an even number (for example, 6 images).
The first image and the fourth image are paired with the same absolute value angle (for example, 100 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character.
The second image and the third image are paired with the same absolute value angle (for example, 80 degrees or 90 degrees) from the vertical direction of the character.

The "paired" position is the position of both tilted by the same absolute value angle with respect to the vertical direction, which is the intermediate position.

(21-7) In the first image (for example, image A), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is a position tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the traveling direction side.
In the second image (for example, image B and image C), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is tilted by 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the traveling direction side.
In the third image (for example, image D and image E), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is tilted by 80 degrees or 90 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the opposite side.
In the fourth image (for example, image F), the position of the character's hand (for example, the position of the right hand) is tilted 100 degrees from the vertical direction of the character on the opposite side.
The position of the image, which is the position between the intermediate position and the second position, is a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position.
The position of the image, which is the position between the intermediate position and the third position, is a position tilted by an angle smaller than 10 degrees from the intermediate position.

(21-8) In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character runs in the traveling direction is displayed.
The character running in the group production (for example, character A (Yumemu-chan)) usually walks and walks.
In the normal time, 30 frames of the image of the walking character are used, and the walking character is always displayed.
In the group effect, the running character frames in and out, and the running character moves faster than the walking character in the normal time.

In this way, in a character that walks normally, the movement of the character is slower than that in the group notice effect, so if more images than the images in the group notice effect are used, the roughness of the animation becomes conspicuous. Although 30 frames of images are used, in the group notice production, the movement of the hands or feet is faster than the normal character, so even if some of the images are omitted, it should be shown to the player as a smooth animation. And the designer does not have to prepare many images.

(21-9) (2020-285) One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least the first image (for example, image A) and the second image (for example, image B and image C). Configured,
In one cycle of the predetermined animation, the first image has a longer display time than the second image (for example, the image A has more frames than the image B and the image C), and the first image is the first image. It is an animation image that is more characteristic than the two images.
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed.
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image.
The first image is a characteristic image representing the predetermined animation rather than the second image.
The display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than the display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.

As a result, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than images B and C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group notice effect shine. It is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

The "characteristic" animation image includes an image in which the hand (arm) is positioned at the angle at which the angle from the vertical direction is most inclined, as in the present embodiment, and the player pays more attention than other images. It is an easy-to-use image. Further, in the "characteristic" animation image, the first position in which the character's hand is located at the highest point on the traveling direction side of the character among the swing widths of the hand shaken when the character constituting the group effect moves. Refers to the first image to be, and the fourth image to be the fourth position located at the highest point on the side opposite to the traveling direction of the character. The first image and the fourth image are images at positions that are not included (not reachable) in the waving width of the character walking on the liquid crystal display at normal times, as shown in FIG. 171. It is also possible to apply the same idea to the legs of a character (comparing a character that constitutes a group effect with a character that normally walks on the liquid crystal, and a foot that only the character that constitutes the group effect swings. An image of position (angle) is defined as a "characteristic image").

(21-10) The first image has the same display time as the fourth image (for example, display time for 5 frames).
The first image and the fourth image have the longest display time among the plurality of images.

As a result, the animation in the group notice effect can be made to shine, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(21-11) In the predetermined animation, one cycle of animation composed of a plurality of images (for example, one cycle of animation shown in FIG. 173) is repeated a plurality of times.
The plurality of images include the first image, the second image, the third image, and the fourth image.
One cycle is time-designed so that the first image, the second image, the third image, the fourth image, the third image, and the second image are displayed in this order.
The first image and the fourth image are displayed for the longest time.

As a result, the animation in the group notice effect can be made to shine, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(21-12) In the case of a walking animation of a character, the first image and the fourth image are not used.
In the case of the predetermined animation in which the character runs, the first image and the fourth image are used as characteristic images.

In this way, a characteristic image such as image A or image F that raises the hand most represents a characteristic part that represents the action of the character running, and such a characteristic image is a characteristic image. It is not used for normal character walking animation.

(21-13) (2020-286) The display layer of the group effect has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced decorative symbol and a lower priority than the display layer of the small symbol.
The predetermined animation of the group effect is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the reduced decorative pattern (for example, the example shown in FIG. 45).
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Display means and
Equipped with a production execution means,
The effect executing means is
The display means can execute the variable display of the first decoration identification information and the variable display of the second decoration identification information.
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests whether or not the advantageous state is obtained.
It is possible to execute a group effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group on the display means.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The effect executing means is
The variable display of the first decoration identification information is displayed in the first size, and then the variable display of the first decoration identification information is displayed in the second size smaller than the first size when the specific effect is executed. death,
The variable display of the second decoration identification information is displayed in a third size smaller than the second size, and then the variable display of the second decoration identification information is displayed in the third size even when the specific effect is executed. Display with
When the group effect is executed during the execution of the specific effect, the characters constituting the group effect in the second display period pass through the front side of the variable display of the first decoration identification information and the second decoration. The group effect is executed so as to pass through the back side of the variable display of the identification information.

As a result, the character in the group notice effect is displayed as an image so as to pass through the front side of the reduced decorative pattern, so that the group notice effect can be made more dynamic. On the other hand, since the image is displayed so as to pass through the back side of the small symbol by the character in the group advance notice effect, the visibility of the fluctuation of the symbol in the reach effect can be ensured, and the group advance notice effect is preferably provided. Can be done. In this embodiment, the characters constituting the group effect in the second display period during the execution of the specific effect (for example, reach effect) are on the front side of the variable display (for example, the reduced decorative pattern) of the first decoration identification information. The group effect is executed so as to pass through the back side of the variable display of the second decorative identification information (for example, a small symbol or the fourth symbol at all times), but this event is limited to the second display period. However, it can occur in the first display period and the third display period as well. That is, in the first display period only when the characters constituting the group effect start to appear, and in the third display period only when the characters constituting the group effect are released, the characters constituting the group effect are the first decoration identification information. Since it passes through the front side of the variable display (for example, a reduced decorative symbol) and the back side of the variable display of the second decorative identification information (for example, always a small symbol or a fourth symbol), the group is more grouped. The notice production can be made into a dynamic production.

(21-14) In the image display period in the group effect, the period in which the decorative pattern reduced and displayed by the display of the character in the group effect is hidden is the decoration reduced and displayed by the display of the character in the group effect. It is longer than the period when the design is not hidden.

As a result, the time for which the screen including the image of the decorative pattern is filled by the character in the group notice effect becomes longer, and the group notice effect can be made more dynamic.

(21-15) The display layer of the effect (for example, an image of sand smoke) attached to the character in the group effect has a higher priority than the display layer of the reduced decorative pattern.

As a result, the effect image of sand smoke in the group notice effect is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the reduced decorative pattern, so that the group notice effect can be made more dynamic.

(21-16) The display layer of the group effect is the same as the display layer of the cut-in effect generated during the execution of the reach effect that incites whether or not the display result of the variable display is the specific display result.

In this way, by providing an image in the cut-in display displayed on the same layer as the image in the group advance notice effect separately from the image display layer in the group advance notice effect, some trouble in the image in the group advance notice effect ( For example, even if there is a display problem (such as the image in the group notice effect being displayed on the front side of the 4th symbol), the image in the group notice effect that had the problem is replaced with the image in the cut-in display. It is possible to eliminate problems in the screen display.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described.

(About the display period of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

As a result, by making the character that first appeared in the first display period look longer, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect suggesting a big hit has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, the group notice effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. No. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a lost display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the latter half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) appears as the first (first) character in the first display period, but the main character Maid A appears most often in the second display period. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

As a result, the character of the main character can be frequently shown to the player in the longest second display period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the character displayed first in the first display period may be a premier character.

As a result, the premier character can be shown to the player first in the first first display period, and the group notice effect can be made to have an impact. If the character displayed first in the first display period is a premier character, the jackpot may be fixed. Further, in this case, the light emission pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

The premier character may be the character with the lowest appearance rate among all the states and effects, or may be a character that does not appear except for the group notice effect. Further, the premier character may be a character that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher by appearing than other characters.

(About light emission control in group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 57, but the luminance data may be defined as follows. That is, it includes the first specific luminance data in which the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness and the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at high brightness, and the data for causing the light emitting means to emit light at low brightness. There is a second specific luminance data that does not include data for causing the light emitting means to emit light with high luminance, the first luminance data table does not use the first specific luminance data, and the second luminance data table is a second luminance data table. Specific emission data may be used.

By doing so, since the data that emits light with high brightness is not specified in the first display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are approaching by emitting light of the lamp with low brightness. Since the data that emits light with high brightness is defined in the display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are progressing one after another.

Further, the third luminance data table may include luminance data for turning off all the light emitting means emitted in the second luminance data table.

By doing so, it is possible to express how the character progresses and disappears in the third display period by turning off the lamp.

Further, the light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
A specific member capable of transmitting light is arranged on the front side of the specific light emitting means.
When the specific light emitting means emits light, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes a specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data that causes the light emitting means to emit light in a color different from the specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include the luminance data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light.

By doing so, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group notice effect emits light during the group notice effect, and the lamp is emitted through the transparent specific member located on the front side of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the color to be visually recognized from interfering with the color of the group notice effect by becoming a specific color that is not used in the group notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(About the video data of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, moving image data in which the character to be operated and the operation content (operation pattern) of the character are associated with each other in advance is created at the design stage, and the moving image data is obtained. Was stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the moving image data stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It was. However, the moving image of the group notice effect may be reproduced by a method different from the above.

For example, the data of the character to be operated and the data indicating the operation content (operation pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 obtains character data and operation patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may be the one that selects each of the indicated data, creates moving image data by combining both, and reproduces the created moving image data.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121, a plurality of data in which each of the character A, the character B, and the character C runs or walks is stored in the storage area 1, and an arbitrary plurality of data for which the character is not determined is determined. It suffices to store the moving image data showing a plurality of operation patterns related to the group advance notice effect in the storage area 2, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the character from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached. The moving image data related to the group notice effect may be extracted from the storage area 2 and combined to create one group notice effect moving image data, and the created moving image data may be reproduced.

(When the group notice production and other notice production overlap)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 164, when the execution period of the group notice effect overlaps with the execution period of another notice effect, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is in the other notice effect. An image larger than the display area of the image, and the display of the image in the group notice effect has priority over the display of the image in the other advance notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group advance notice effect is an image in the other advance notice effect). It was on the front side of the display layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect. May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the other notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Further, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the group notice effect is displayed. The display may take precedence over the display of the image in the other advance notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group advance notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the other advance notice effect). When the display area of the image in the other advance notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group advance notice effect, for example, the advance notice image that the player pays attention to, such as an image suggesting a big hit, depends on the image in the group advance notice effect. Although hidden, images located around the preview image (for example, an image showing a flame, an aura, etc. surrounding the preview image) include those that can be visually recognized without being hidden by the image in the group preview effect.

(About the image in the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 171 to 175, images A to F are distinguished according to the position of the character's right hand (right arm), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, images A to F may be distinguished according to the position of the character's left hand (left arm), or images A to F may be distinguished according to the position of the character's right foot or left foot. With respect to the images A and F used in the group notice effect, if a part of the character's body has a characteristic posture, the images A to F may be distinguished according to the position of any part.

In the present embodiment, a characteristic image (for example, image A, image F) is provided for a part of the character's body, but even if a characteristic image is provided for the effect added to the running character. good. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured as follows.

The predetermined animation includes an animation of a feature portion (for example, a hand or foot) related to the character's body and an effect related to the animation of the feature portion (for example, sand smoke added to the hand or foot).
In the predetermined animation, the feature image in the animation of the feature portion has the longest display time.

For example, a sand smoke effect image is displayed so as to be added to a character running away, and a sand smoke effect image is displayed in a characteristic image such as image A or image F, while other images B to images are displayed. In E, the effect image of sand smoke may not be displayed. Alternatively, in a characteristic image such as image A or image F, an effect image that emits the most sand smoke is displayed, while in other images B to E, an effect image that emits a little sand smoke is displayed. It may be displayed. By doing so, the image A and the image F used in the group notice effect can be made more characteristic while they are not used in the normal time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the images in which a part of the body of the character is characteristic are the first image (image A) and the fourth image (image F), but the effect image is added to the character as described above. The added image may be a characteristic first image (image A) or fourth image (image F). In this case, the body of the character does not have to be characteristic, and for example, the hands of the character may be in the same position in any of the images A to F.

The group notice effect is not limited to a human character, but may be another moving object (for example, a car). In this case, the first image (image A) and the fourth image (image F) may be used. , The effect image of sand smoke is displayed, while the effect image of sand smoke may not be displayed in the other images B to E. Alternatively, in a characteristic image such as image A or image F, an effect image that emits the most sand smoke is displayed, while in other images B to E, an effect image that emits a little sand smoke is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, in the group notice effect according to the present embodiment, an animation in which the character runs in the traveling direction is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the group advance notice effect, the character may swim in the traveling direction, and any animation as long as the character moves in the traveling direction can be applied to the group advance notice effect. In addition, when the character swims in the traveling direction in the group notice effect, for example, assuming crawl, the position of the character's hand (for example, the right hand) is the traveling direction side of the hand swing width in the animation. The image that is the first position that extends the most to the first image, and the image that the position of the character's hand (for example, the right hand) is the fourth position that extends the most in the opposite direction of the character in the swing width of the hand in the animation is the first image. 4 images may be used. Further, if the character swims in the traveling direction in the group notice effect, the character may swim in the traveling direction even in the normal time. In this case, in the animation in the group notice effect, the first image and the fourth image as described above are displayed, while in the animation in the normal time, the first image and the fourth image as described above are not displayed. It may be a thing.

<Explanation of the invention using a plurality of configurations>
An invention having the above-mentioned plurality of feature points and having a particularly synergistic effect will be described below.

[The situation is not completely visible only for the first person, the animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different (1)] (2020-287)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed,
The character includes the first character and the second character, and includes the first character and the second character.
The image in the group effect is composed of the character data including the data of the first character and the data of the second character.
The data of the first character and the data of the second character have different parameter values relating to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values relating to the movement of the character are the same.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Furthermore, even when changing the movement speed of the character, by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character, it is possible to reduce the work process regarding the design of the group notice effect, and as a result, a suitable group notice effect. Can be provided.

[Relationship between fade-in and fade-out of group warning sound and display period (2)] (2020-288)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with a sound output means to output sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed,
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. The volume of the effect sound is set to a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. The production sound is output.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Furthermore, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to enliven the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Relationship between lamp scenario scale and display period (3)] (2020-289)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with multiple light emitting means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed,
The luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for causing each of the plurality of luminous means to emit light includes a first luminance data table, a second luminance data table, and a third luminance data table.
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period.
The control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is completed, and during the third display period. Ended in,
The control of the light emitting means by the third luminance data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is completed.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Furthermore, since the lamp emits light with high brightness from the middle of the first display period as in the second display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from before the second display period with the light emitted from the lamp. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[The animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different, the relationship between the fade-in and fade-out of the group warning sound and the display period (4)] (2020-290)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with a sound output means to output sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. The volume of the effect sound is set to a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. Output the production sound,
The character includes the first character and the second character, and includes the first character and the second character.
The image in the group effect is composed of the character data including the data of the first character and the data of the second character.
The data of the first character and the data of the second character have different parameter values relating to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values relating to the movement of the character are the same.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. Further, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character. Furthermore, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to enliven the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It is possible to improve the interest of the game, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different, the relationship between the lamp scenario scale and the display period (5)] (2020-291)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with multiple light emitting means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The image in the group effect is composed of the character data including the first character data and the second character data.
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values related to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character are the same.
The luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for causing each of the plurality of luminous means to emit light includes a first luminance data table, a second luminance data table, and a third luminance data table.
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period.
The control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is completed, and during the third display period. Ended in,
The control of the light emitting means by the third luminance data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is completed.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. Further, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character. Furthermore, since the lamp emits light with high brightness from the middle of the first display period as in the second display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from before the second display period with the light emitted from the lamp. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Relationship between fade-in and fade-out of group warning sound and display period, relationship between lamp scenario scale and display period (6)] (2020-292)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
With multiple light emitting means,
Equipped with a sound output means to output sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for causing each of the plurality of luminous means to emit light includes a first luminance data table, a second luminance data table, and a third luminance data table.
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period.
The control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is completed, and during the third display period. Ended in,
The control of the light emitting means by the third luminance data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is completed.
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. The volume of the effect sound is set to a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. The production sound is output.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It can improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the lamp emits light with high brightness from the middle of the first display period as in the second display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from before the second display period with the light emitted from the lamp. As a result, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[The display time of multiple image data constituting the animation of the character is not uniform (7)] (2020-293).
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed,
In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed.
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image.
The first image is a characteristic image representing the predetermined animation rather than the second image.
The display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than the display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can. Further, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B and image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group notice effect shine, resulting in a result. As a result, a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

[Animation parameter values are the same even if the speed is different, and the display time of multiple image data constituting the animation of the character is not uniform (8)] (2020-294).
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The image in the group effect is composed of the character data including the first character data and the second character data.
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values related to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character are the same.
In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed.
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image.
The first image is a characteristic image representing the predetermined animation rather than the second image.
The display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than the display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. Further, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character. Further, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B and image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group notice effect shine, resulting in a result. As a result, a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

[The display time of multiple image data constituting the fade-in, fade-out and display period of the group warning sound, and the animation of the character is not uniform (9)] (2020-295).
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with a sound output means to output sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. The volume of the effect sound is set to a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. Output the production sound,
In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed.
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image.
The first image is a characteristic image representing the predetermined animation rather than the second image.
The display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than the display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It can improve the interest of the game. Further, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B and image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group notice effect shine, resulting in a result. As a result, a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

[Relationship between lamp scenario scale and display period, display time of multiple image data constituting character animation is not uniform (10)] (2020-296)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with multiple light emitting means,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for causing each of the plurality of luminous means to emit light includes a first luminance data table, a second luminance data table, and a third luminance data table.
The control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is started at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and is ended during the first display period.
The control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is started during the first display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the first luminance data table is completed, and during the third display period. Ended in,
The control of the light emitting means by the third luminance data table is started during the third display period and after the control of the light emitting means by the second luminance data table is completed.
In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed.
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image.
The first image is a characteristic image representing the predetermined animation rather than the second image.
The display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than the display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.
[Effect] In the group notice effect, the second display period in which characters appear one after another and progress is longer than the first display period from the first start of character display to the first end of character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the lamp emits light with high brightness from the middle of the first display period as in the second display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from before the second display period with the light emitted from the lamp. can. Further, a characteristic image such as image A has a longer display time (more frames) than image B and image C, which makes it possible to make the animation in the group notice effect shine, resulting in a result. As a result, a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(Example of time saving control that does not go through hit)
Next, an example of executing a time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) as a time saving state will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving symbol)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always shifts via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7A. It may be made to shift to the state). That is, as the time saving state, the time saving control may be executed without going through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.).

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of a lost symbol or a part of a small hit symbol.

(A3) Further, when the lottery process relating to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol is performed, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol. Or a random number for performing other lottery such as a lottery random number of a big hit symbol, a lottery random number of a small hit symbol, a random number for determining a big hit lottery, and a lottery random number of a fall lottery, the lottery may be performed.

(A4) Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

(A5) Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the time-saving symbol is used for all the set values. Although the lottery probabilities are the same, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start port (first start). It may be at the time of winning a prize at the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving symbol is drawn. When a small hit symbol random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a fall lottery judgment value random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the fall lottery judgment value random number can be used as the winning value. , A lottery using a structure, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

(A8) When the time-saving symbol is drawn using a structure and the small hit symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number (time-saving number) in the time-saving state depends on whether or not the time-saving region has passed. Make sure it doesn't change.

(A9) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and the big hit symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

(A10) Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Further, even when the same time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time reductions given may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Further, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

(A15) Further, the number of times the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed (time reduction end lottery) is executed, and the number of time reductions is set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

(A16) Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

(A17) Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

(A18) Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, a high probability at the time of opening the game hall. It is a low-base state, and the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

(A20) Further, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

(A21) Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time saving control examples using time saving symbols)
As another time saving control using the time saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the special symbol is performed in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving symbol is displayed, the game control for further shifting from the time saving state to the same time saving state is not performed (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (time saving state). May not be controlled to switch the game state). Then, different effects may be produced when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol). In the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general lost symbol is displayed.) This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays the common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. A different symbol may be displayed as a display result in the reduced working hours state (for example, the decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the reduced working hours symbol in the normal state, but simply displays a lost symbol in the reduced working hours state, etc.). Do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, the display result of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state does not give the player a feeling of loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol is a special symbol (time saving symbol) is executed, but in the time saving state, the decorative symbol is executed. It is also possible not to execute the effect suggesting whether or not the display result of is a special symbol (time saving symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player has lost the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect in the time-saving state, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbol (the time for displaying the fixed surface result and then maintaining the display state) differs between the normal state and the time saving state. You may control it. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is produced in a time-saving state.

(B5) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time-saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. (Display effect, etc.), right-handed game is played in response to right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed) during the time-saving state, and variable display based on the hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Until all is done. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B6) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time-saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until all the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B7) Left-handed notification is executed in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is completed. You may. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit (small hit, big hit) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed is It may be different. As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B9) In the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, a common effect is obtained when there is holding storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no holding storage information. It is possible to execute different effects after executing (For example, when there is hold storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the fourth hold storage information out of the four remaining hold storage, the third hold memory A common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed until the variable display based on the information, and a time saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. It may be possible). As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B10) The effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) stored based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed differs depending on the effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, the production changes according to the game state, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(B11) Confirmation display time of display result in variable display (second variable display) based on remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after the confirmed surface result is displayed. The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information is executed may be common. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period when the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed and the variable display is based on the remaining hold storage information. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period when the next variable display is started. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result) such as a hit symbol or a big hit symbol or a time-saving symbol (special display result). The ratio of the time-saving symbols (special display result) may be different depending on which of the common specific effects provided is executed. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period at which the next variable display is started. As a result, it is possible to suitably control the effect according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a hit symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is abundant, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control has a common variation pattern depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result), a time-saving symbol (special display result), or a lost symbol (predetermined display result). Is selectable, and even when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the same fluctuation pattern from the game control CPU 103, different effects are displayed in the variable display according to the type of the symbol specification command that specifies the display result. May be made feasible. As a result, the variation of the variable display effect is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained may or may not be executed (for example, a plurality of types). Of the super reach productions in the above, when performing the production with the highest expectation, the special production is not executed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a hit (a display moved from the display position of the hold display to another display position, and is currently being executed). The expectation (ratio) that becomes the time saving symbol (special display result) is made different according to the production mode of the production) that displays the effect that can suggest the expectation of the hit corresponding to the variable display of. May be good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, after performing the effect (such as the time-saving suggestion effect) that suggests that the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, the winning symbol (specification) is executed. It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot whose game value is higher than that of a time-saving state) to notify the display result). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled to a time reduction state (special state) in which the number of time reductions (time reduction continuation period) differs according to the types of time reduction symbols (special display results) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the first). The 1st time reduction symbol: 50 times of time reduction, the 2nd time reduction symbol: 100 times of time reduction, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time reduction symbol is stopped depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect, etc.). You may execute effects with different number of time reductions (duration). As a result, depending on the type of production, the player's attention can be focused on the subsequent time reduction, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game is controlled to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. The transmitted command includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the effect control CPU 120 executes a plurality of types of commands including the special command. A look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information that is specified to execute the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information when received. You may want to limit the execution (do not execute at all, make it executable in rare cases, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, the look-ahead for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot gaming state (specific game state) is executed. The execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. Then, as the look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of such a look-ahead notice effect, it may be possible to execute the effect of a common mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) The variable display based on the hold storage information for the look-ahead target is a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the display and the case, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B25) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute an effect having a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, hold when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red). Do not change the display color to red, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B26) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red, the color of the hold display is changed to red. Do not change, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(Example of time reduction control using the variable display count that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the loss variable display count)
Next, an example of time saving control using a variable display count (number of continuations of variable display that has been lost) that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in a normal state will be described. As shown below, in the time saving state (special state), the number of continuations of the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached the special number (for example, 1000 times). May be feasible on condition of. As the predetermined result, the time saving state (special state) may be executed on condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the loss display result reaches the special number of times.

(C1) A game based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a specific display result after the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol are performed. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person, and the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is concerned. Based on the above, when the special condition that the number of executions (continuation) of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result reaches the special number (for example, 1000 times) is satisfied, the normal state is changed to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to be transferred. Then, the numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times that the predetermined display result is obtained is continuously updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, so that the player can be easily rescued due to the time saving state. , It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time saving state.

(C2) The special condition is satisfied when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result is continuously displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). You may do it. As a result, when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (probability change state, time saving state). As a result, the player can be suitably relieved when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be satisfied by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition is described. May be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when the player no longer needs to be rescued, such as when the player is in a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs substantially, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the backup is stored when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, so that it is suppressed from being disadvantageous to the amusement park side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times or more), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for a period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more). In the time saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state) and A different effect may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time of the second time saving state is shorter than that of the first time saving state. It is possible to change the appearance of the production, such as, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game. It should be noted that the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state) without executing such an effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player is in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), and suppresses a decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process relating to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. also. It is possible to hit the game ball into the first path (left side game area) and the second path (right side game area). In the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. Then, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), it is notified that the second path should be fired (for example, right-handed notification by a right-handed lamp or the like). You may do it. Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, by making the right-handed lamp emit light by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the firing direction early (before the actual start of the time reduction fluctuation) when actually shifting to the time reduction state (special state). Will be.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. .. As a result, since the control to the advantageous state is prioritized over the control to the time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the player's hobby of the game is enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes a specific value based on the fact that the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), it is controlled to a time saving state (special state), and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached). When changing the flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set) and controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You may. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the control of shifting to the time saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines a variation pattern of a symbol determination time that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, fluctuation pattern) according to the case where the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value and the third numerical value in the special state. .. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, different gaming states can be suitably identified, which facilitates gaming control. Then, if the command is different according to the game state identified at that time, the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) can execute suitable effect control according to the game state.

(C14) In the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot game state ends). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the special condition (variable display number of times). The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). The fluctuation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the special display result (time saving symbol) is displayed and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the display of the special display result (time saving symbol) and the special condition (variable display number of times). The same effect may be executed when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In such a case, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 has predetermined information (predetermined information) based on the backed up and stored data when the power is turned on. It is possible to transmit a ram clear command at the time of cold start and a command for notifying the number of fluctuations displayed until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. A suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display was executed in a predetermined period after the power was turned on (so-called morning appearance is different, the background image is different, and an effect that suggests whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuation is executed. (Easy, etc.) may be made feasible. It is possible to give the player a motivation to play the game in the morning, so that the operating rate of the game machine increases and the processing load does not increase.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command capable of specifying information related to the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is capable of transmitting the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to execute a special effect (such as an effect of suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. Then, as the specific information, the first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect) capable of specifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is a predetermined value (for example, 127) or less is specified. Information) and second specific information (such as a command that counts down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 127). May be good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting the function to the player, and it is possible to suitably realize the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 is put into a time saving state (special state) when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for time-saving state suggestion effect control) suggesting that it is controlled, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, for example) less than the first predetermined number of times before the variable display of the special number of times is executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly losing the player by suggesting the function to the player on a regular basis.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. A different effect (such as a different effect when shifting to the time-saving state) is executed when the state is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the condition and when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. When the condition is controlled based on the condition, different effects are executed after being controlled to the time saving state (special state) (the effect after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the time-saving symbol, the case where the big hit occurs, or the case where the loss occurs.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but is an enclosed type that encloses the gaming media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, depending on the player. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative pattern display area, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp 10 General winning opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Audio control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special figure LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start port switch, 23 count Switch, 24V winning switch, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passing gate, 50 4th symbol unit, 81, 82, 83 solenoid, 100 Gaming control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group,
Equipped with a sound output means to output sound,
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. The volume of the effect sound is set to a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. Output the production sound,
In the group production, a predetermined animation in which the character moves in the traveling direction is displayed.
One cycle of the predetermined animation is composed of a plurality of images including at least a first image and a second image.
The first image is a characteristic image representing the predetermined animation rather than the second image.
A gaming machine in which the display time of the first image in one cycle of the predetermined animation is longer than the display time of the second image in one cycle of the predetermined animation.

Images